aboutsummaryrefslogtreecommitdiffstats
path: root/Documentation
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorHaavard Skinnemoen <haavard.skinnemoen@atmel.com>2008-07-27 07:54:08 -0400
committerHaavard Skinnemoen <haavard.skinnemoen@atmel.com>2008-07-27 07:54:08 -0400
commiteda3d8f5604860aae1bb9996bb5efc4213778369 (patch)
tree9d3887d2665bcc5f5abf200758794545c7b2c69b /Documentation
parent87a9f704658a40940e740b1d73d861667e9164d3 (diff)
parent8be1a6d6c77ab4532e4476fdb8177030ef48b52c (diff)
Merge commit 'upstream/master'
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
-rw-r--r--Documentation/00-INDEX2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-dev20
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory24
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm6
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-hugepages15
-rw-r--r--Documentation/CodingStyle42
-rw-r--r--Documentation/DMA-API.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt9
-rw-r--r--Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl38
-rw-r--r--Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl57
-rw-r--r--Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl63
-rw-r--r--Documentation/HOWTO2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt11
-rw-r--r--Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c8
-rw-r--r--Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt9
-rw-r--r--Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt67
-rw-r--r--Documentation/controllers/memory.txt3
-rw-r--r--Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/edac.txt153
-rw-r--r--Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt131
-rw-r--r--Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt46
-rw-r--r--Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt52
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/Locking7
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/bfs.txt10
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt10
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c14
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/nfs-rdma.txt103
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt106
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt48
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt10
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt6
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt8
-rw-r--r--Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt6
-rw-r--r--Documentation/gpio.txt135
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt8
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ia64/paravirt_ops.txt137
-rw-r--r--Documentation/input/cs461x.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/input/gameport-programming.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/input/input.txt1
-rw-r--r--Documentation/input/joystick-api.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt1
-rw-r--r--Documentation/input/joystick.txt1
-rw-r--r--Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/iostats.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN6
-rw-r--r--Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt62
-rw-r--r--Documentation/keys.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt26
-rw-r--r--Documentation/leds-class.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/local_ops.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/md.txt30
-rw-r--r--Documentation/moxa-smartio392
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/bonding.txt112
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/can.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/dm9000.txt167
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/e1000.txt14
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt21
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt419
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/README67
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/hostapd.conf11
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/wpa_supplicant.conf10
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt90
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/s2io.txt7
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt15
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/udplite.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/power/00-INDEX4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt32
-rw-r--r--Documentation/power/pm.txt257
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt332
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt38
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt53
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt17
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/pmc.txt63
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt31
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/upm-nand.txt28
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/led.txt15
-rw-r--r--Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/rfkill.txt547
-rw-r--r--Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt6
-rw-r--r--Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt6
-rw-r--r--Documentation/serial/driver11
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sh/clk.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt10
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/specialix.txt8
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt5
-rw-r--r--Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt13
-rw-r--r--Documentation/timers/highres.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt32
-rw-r--r--Documentation/usb/authorization.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt35
-rw-r--r--Documentation/usb/persist.txt7
-rw-r--r--Documentation/usb/uhci.txt165
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx238851
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx5
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa71348
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/cx18.txt36
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt243
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt2
-rw-r--r--Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt3
-rw-r--r--Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt25
-rw-r--r--Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt4
-rw-r--r--Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt2
111 files changed, 3531 insertions, 1391 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/00-INDEX b/Documentation/00-INDEX
index 1977fab38656..6de71308a906 100644
--- a/Documentation/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/00-INDEX
@@ -361,8 +361,6 @@ telephony/
361 - directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support. 361 - directory with info on telephony (e.g. voice over IP) support.
362time_interpolators.txt 362time_interpolators.txt
363 - info on time interpolators. 363 - info on time interpolators.
364tipar.txt
365 - information about Parallel link cable for Texas Instruments handhelds.
366tty.txt 364tty.txt
367 - guide to the locking policies of the tty layer. 365 - guide to the locking policies of the tty layer.
368uml/ 366uml/
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-dev b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-dev
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a9f2b8b0530f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-dev
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
1What: /sys/dev
2Date: April 2008
3KernelVersion: 2.6.26
4Contact: Dan Williams <dan.j.williams@intel.com>
5Description: The /sys/dev tree provides a method to look up the sysfs
6 path for a device using the information returned from
7 stat(2). There are two directories, 'block' and 'char',
8 beneath /sys/dev containing symbolic links with names of
9 the form "<major>:<minor>". These links point to the
10 corresponding sysfs path for the given device.
11
12 Example:
13 $ readlink /sys/dev/block/8:32
14 ../../block/sdc
15
16 Entries in /sys/dev/char and /sys/dev/block will be
17 dynamically created and destroyed as devices enter and
18 leave the system.
19
20Users: mdadm <linux-raid@vger.kernel.org>
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7a16fe1e2270
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-memory
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
1What: /sys/devices/system/memory
2Date: June 2008
3Contact: Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
4Description:
5 The /sys/devices/system/memory contains a snapshot of the
6 internal state of the kernel memory blocks. Files could be
7 added or removed dynamically to represent hot-add/remove
8 operations.
9
10Users: hotplug memory add/remove tools
11 https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/
12
13What: /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/removable
14Date: June 2008
15Contact: Badari Pulavarty <pbadari@us.ibm.com>
16Description:
17 The file /sys/devices/system/memory/memoryX/removable
18 indicates whether this memory block is removable or not.
19 This is useful for a user-level agent to determine
20 identify removable sections of the memory before attempting
21 potentially expensive hot-remove memory operation
22
23Users: hotplug memory remove tools
24 https://w3.opensource.ibm.com/projects/powerpc-utils/
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..190d523ac159
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
1What: /sys/kernel/mm
2Date: July 2008
3Contact: Nishanth Aravamudan <nacc@us.ibm.com>, VM maintainers
4Description:
5 /sys/kernel/mm/ should contain any and all VM
6 related information in /sys/kernel/.
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-hugepages b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-hugepages
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e21c00571cf4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-kernel-mm-hugepages
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
1What: /sys/kernel/mm/hugepages/
2Date: June 2008
3Contact: Nishanth Aravamudan <nacc@us.ibm.com>, hugetlb maintainers
4Description:
5 /sys/kernel/mm/hugepages/ contains a number of subdirectories
6 of the form hugepages-<size>kB, where <size> is the page size
7 of the hugepages supported by the kernel/CPU combination.
8
9 Under these directories are a number of files:
10 nr_hugepages
11 nr_overcommit_hugepages
12 free_hugepages
13 surplus_hugepages
14 resv_hugepages
15 See Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt for details.
diff --git a/Documentation/CodingStyle b/Documentation/CodingStyle
index 6caa14615578..1875e502f872 100644
--- a/Documentation/CodingStyle
+++ b/Documentation/CodingStyle
@@ -474,25 +474,29 @@ make a good program).
474So, you can either get rid of GNU emacs, or change it to use saner 474So, you can either get rid of GNU emacs, or change it to use saner
475values. To do the latter, you can stick the following in your .emacs file: 475values. To do the latter, you can stick the following in your .emacs file:
476 476
477(defun linux-c-mode () 477(defun c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only (ignored)
478 "C mode with adjusted defaults for use with the Linux kernel." 478 "Line up argument lists by tabs, not spaces"
479 (interactive) 479 (let* ((anchor (c-langelem-pos c-syntactic-element))
480 (c-mode) 480 (column (c-langelem-2nd-pos c-syntactic-element))
481 (c-set-style "K&R") 481 (offset (- (1+ column) anchor))
482 (setq tab-width 8) 482 (steps (floor offset c-basic-offset)))
483 (setq indent-tabs-mode t) 483 (* (max steps 1)
484 (setq c-basic-offset 8)) 484 c-basic-offset)))
485 485
486This will define the M-x linux-c-mode command. When hacking on a 486(add-hook 'c-mode-hook
487module, if you put the string -*- linux-c -*- somewhere on the first 487 (lambda ()
488two lines, this mode will be automatically invoked. Also, you may want 488 (let ((filename (buffer-file-name)))
489to add 489 ;; Enable kernel mode for the appropriate files
490 490 (when (and filename
491(setq auto-mode-alist (cons '("/usr/src/linux.*/.*\\.[ch]$" . linux-c-mode) 491 (string-match "~/src/linux-trees" filename))
492 auto-mode-alist)) 492 (setq indent-tabs-mode t)
493 493 (c-set-style "linux")
494to your .emacs file if you want to have linux-c-mode switched on 494 (c-set-offset 'arglist-cont-nonempty
495automagically when you edit source files under /usr/src/linux. 495 '(c-lineup-gcc-asm-reg
496 c-lineup-arglist-tabs-only))))))
497
498This will make emacs go better with the kernel coding style for C
499files below ~/src/linux-trees.
496 500
497But even if you fail in getting emacs to do sane formatting, not 501But even if you fail in getting emacs to do sane formatting, not
498everything is lost: use "indent". 502everything is lost: use "indent".
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
index 80d150458c80..d8b63d164e41 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API.txt
@@ -298,10 +298,10 @@ recommended that you never use these unless you really know what the
298cache width is. 298cache width is.
299 299
300int 300int
301dma_mapping_error(dma_addr_t dma_addr) 301dma_mapping_error(struct device *dev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
302 302
303int 303int
304pci_dma_mapping_error(dma_addr_t dma_addr) 304pci_dma_mapping_error(struct pci_dev *hwdev, dma_addr_t dma_addr)
305 305
306In some circumstances dma_map_single and dma_map_page will fail to create 306In some circumstances dma_map_single and dma_map_page will fail to create
307a mapping. A driver can check for these errors by testing the returned 307a mapping. A driver can check for these errors by testing the returned
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt b/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt
index 6d772f84b477..b768cc0e402b 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-attributes.txt
@@ -22,3 +22,12 @@ ready and available in memory. The DMA of the "completion indication"
22could race with data DMA. Mapping the memory used for completion 22could race with data DMA. Mapping the memory used for completion
23indications with DMA_ATTR_WRITE_BARRIER would prevent the race. 23indications with DMA_ATTR_WRITE_BARRIER would prevent the race.
24 24
25DMA_ATTR_WEAK_ORDERING
26----------------------
27
28DMA_ATTR_WEAK_ORDERING specifies that reads and writes to the mapping
29may be weakly ordered, that is that reads and writes may pass each other.
30
31Since it is optional for platforms to implement DMA_ATTR_WEAK_ORDERING,
32those that do not will simply ignore the attribute and exhibit default
33behavior.
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl
index 5a8ffa761e09..ea3bc9565e6a 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/gadget.tmpl
@@ -524,6 +524,44 @@ These utilities include endpoint autoconfiguration.
524<!-- !Edrivers/usb/gadget/epautoconf.c --> 524<!-- !Edrivers/usb/gadget/epautoconf.c -->
525</sect1> 525</sect1>
526 526
527<sect1 id="composite"><title>Composite Device Framework</title>
528
529<para>The core API is sufficient for writing drivers for composite
530USB devices (with more than one function in a given configuration),
531and also multi-configuration devices (also more than one function,
532but not necessarily sharing a given configuration).
533There is however an optional framework which makes it easier to
534reuse and combine functions.
535</para>
536
537<para>Devices using this framework provide a <emphasis>struct
538usb_composite_driver</emphasis>, which in turn provides one or
539more <emphasis>struct usb_configuration</emphasis> instances.
540Each such configuration includes at least one
541<emphasis>struct usb_function</emphasis>, which packages a user
542visible role such as "network link" or "mass storage device".
543Management functions may also exist, such as "Device Firmware
544Upgrade".
545</para>
546
547!Iinclude/linux/usb/composite.h
548!Edrivers/usb/gadget/composite.c
549
550</sect1>
551
552<sect1 id="functions"><title>Composite Device Functions</title>
553
554<para>At this writing, a few of the current gadget drivers have
555been converted to this framework.
556Near-term plans include converting all of them, except for "gadgetfs".
557</para>
558
559!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_acm.c
560!Edrivers/usb/gadget/f_serial.c
561
562</sect1>
563
564
527</chapter> 565</chapter>
528 566
529<chapter id="controllers"><title>Peripheral Controller Drivers</title> 567<chapter id="controllers"><title>Peripheral Controller Drivers</title>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl
index 2510763295d0..084f6ad7b7a0 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/kernel-locking.tmpl
@@ -219,10 +219,10 @@
219 </para> 219 </para>
220 220
221 <sect1 id="lock-intro"> 221 <sect1 id="lock-intro">
222 <title>Three Main Types of Kernel Locks: Spinlocks, Mutexes and Semaphores</title> 222 <title>Two Main Types of Kernel Locks: Spinlocks and Mutexes</title>
223 223
224 <para> 224 <para>
225 There are three main types of kernel locks. The fundamental type 225 There are two main types of kernel locks. The fundamental type
226 is the spinlock 226 is the spinlock
227 (<filename class="headerfile">include/asm/spinlock.h</filename>), 227 (<filename class="headerfile">include/asm/spinlock.h</filename>),
228 which is a very simple single-holder lock: if you can't get the 228 which is a very simple single-holder lock: if you can't get the
@@ -240,14 +240,6 @@
240 use a spinlock instead. 240 use a spinlock instead.
241 </para> 241 </para>
242 <para> 242 <para>
243 The third type is a semaphore
244 (<filename class="headerfile">include/linux/semaphore.h</filename>): it
245 can have more than one holder at any time (the number decided at
246 initialization time), although it is most commonly used as a
247 single-holder lock (a mutex). If you can't get a semaphore, your
248 task will be suspended and later on woken up - just like for mutexes.
249 </para>
250 <para>
251 Neither type of lock is recursive: see 243 Neither type of lock is recursive: see
252 <xref linkend="deadlock"/>. 244 <xref linkend="deadlock"/>.
253 </para> 245 </para>
@@ -278,7 +270,7 @@
278 </para> 270 </para>
279 271
280 <para> 272 <para>
281 Semaphores still exist, because they are required for 273 Mutexes still exist, because they are required for
282 synchronization between <firstterm linkend="gloss-usercontext">user 274 synchronization between <firstterm linkend="gloss-usercontext">user
283 contexts</firstterm>, as we will see below. 275 contexts</firstterm>, as we will see below.
284 </para> 276 </para>
@@ -289,18 +281,17 @@
289 281
290 <para> 282 <para>
291 If you have a data structure which is only ever accessed from 283 If you have a data structure which is only ever accessed from
292 user context, then you can use a simple semaphore 284 user context, then you can use a simple mutex
293 (<filename>linux/linux/semaphore.h</filename>) to protect it. This 285 (<filename>include/linux/mutex.h</filename>) to protect it. This
294 is the most trivial case: you initialize the semaphore to the number 286 is the most trivial case: you initialize the mutex. Then you can
295 of resources available (usually 1), and call 287 call <function>mutex_lock_interruptible()</function> to grab the mutex,
296 <function>down_interruptible()</function> to grab the semaphore, and 288 and <function>mutex_unlock()</function> to release it. There is also a
297 <function>up()</function> to release it. There is also a 289 <function>mutex_lock()</function>, which should be avoided, because it
298 <function>down()</function>, which should be avoided, because it
299 will not return if a signal is received. 290 will not return if a signal is received.
300 </para> 291 </para>
301 292
302 <para> 293 <para>
303 Example: <filename>linux/net/core/netfilter.c</filename> allows 294 Example: <filename>net/netfilter/nf_sockopt.c</filename> allows
304 registration of new <function>setsockopt()</function> and 295 registration of new <function>setsockopt()</function> and
305 <function>getsockopt()</function> calls, with 296 <function>getsockopt()</function> calls, with
306 <function>nf_register_sockopt()</function>. Registration and 297 <function>nf_register_sockopt()</function>. Registration and
@@ -515,7 +506,7 @@
515 <listitem> 506 <listitem>
516 <para> 507 <para>
517 If you are in a process context (any syscall) and want to 508 If you are in a process context (any syscall) and want to
518 lock other process out, use a semaphore. You can take a semaphore 509 lock other process out, use a mutex. You can take a mutex
519 and sleep (<function>copy_from_user*(</function> or 510 and sleep (<function>copy_from_user*(</function> or
520 <function>kmalloc(x,GFP_KERNEL)</function>). 511 <function>kmalloc(x,GFP_KERNEL)</function>).
521 </para> 512 </para>
@@ -662,7 +653,7 @@
662<entry>SLBH</entry> 653<entry>SLBH</entry>
663<entry>SLBH</entry> 654<entry>SLBH</entry>
664<entry>SLBH</entry> 655<entry>SLBH</entry>
665<entry>DI</entry> 656<entry>MLI</entry>
666<entry>None</entry> 657<entry>None</entry>
667</row> 658</row>
668 659
@@ -692,8 +683,8 @@
692<entry>spin_lock_bh</entry> 683<entry>spin_lock_bh</entry>
693</row> 684</row>
694<row> 685<row>
695<entry>DI</entry> 686<entry>MLI</entry>
696<entry>down_interruptible</entry> 687<entry>mutex_lock_interruptible</entry>
697</row> 688</row>
698 689
699</tbody> 690</tbody>
@@ -1310,7 +1301,7 @@ as Alan Cox says, <quote>Lock data, not code</quote>.
1310 <para> 1301 <para>
1311 There is a coding bug where a piece of code tries to grab a 1302 There is a coding bug where a piece of code tries to grab a
1312 spinlock twice: it will spin forever, waiting for the lock to 1303 spinlock twice: it will spin forever, waiting for the lock to
1313 be released (spinlocks, rwlocks and semaphores are not 1304 be released (spinlocks, rwlocks and mutexes are not
1314 recursive in Linux). This is trivial to diagnose: not a 1305 recursive in Linux). This is trivial to diagnose: not a
1315 stay-up-five-nights-talk-to-fluffy-code-bunnies kind of 1306 stay-up-five-nights-talk-to-fluffy-code-bunnies kind of
1316 problem. 1307 problem.
@@ -1335,7 +1326,7 @@ as Alan Cox says, <quote>Lock data, not code</quote>.
1335 1326
1336 <para> 1327 <para>
1337 This complete lockup is easy to diagnose: on SMP boxes the 1328 This complete lockup is easy to diagnose: on SMP boxes the
1338 watchdog timer or compiling with <symbol>DEBUG_SPINLOCKS</symbol> set 1329 watchdog timer or compiling with <symbol>DEBUG_SPINLOCK</symbol> set
1339 (<filename>include/linux/spinlock.h</filename>) will show this up 1330 (<filename>include/linux/spinlock.h</filename>) will show this up
1340 immediately when it happens. 1331 immediately when it happens.
1341 </para> 1332 </para>
@@ -1558,7 +1549,7 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done.
1558 <title>Read/Write Lock Variants</title> 1549 <title>Read/Write Lock Variants</title>
1559 1550
1560 <para> 1551 <para>
1561 Both spinlocks and semaphores have read/write variants: 1552 Both spinlocks and mutexes have read/write variants:
1562 <type>rwlock_t</type> and <structname>struct rw_semaphore</structname>. 1553 <type>rwlock_t</type> and <structname>struct rw_semaphore</structname>.
1563 These divide users into two classes: the readers and the writers. If 1554 These divide users into two classes: the readers and the writers. If
1564 you are only reading the data, you can get a read lock, but to write to 1555 you are only reading the data, you can get a read lock, but to write to
@@ -1681,7 +1672,7 @@ the amount of locking which needs to be done.
1681 #include &lt;linux/slab.h&gt; 1672 #include &lt;linux/slab.h&gt;
1682 #include &lt;linux/string.h&gt; 1673 #include &lt;linux/string.h&gt;
1683+#include &lt;linux/rcupdate.h&gt; 1674+#include &lt;linux/rcupdate.h&gt;
1684 #include &lt;linux/semaphore.h&gt; 1675 #include &lt;linux/mutex.h&gt;
1685 #include &lt;asm/errno.h&gt; 1676 #include &lt;asm/errno.h&gt;
1686 1677
1687 struct object 1678 struct object
@@ -1913,7 +1904,7 @@ machines due to caching.
1913 </listitem> 1904 </listitem>
1914 <listitem> 1905 <listitem>
1915 <para> 1906 <para>
1916 <function> put_user()</function> 1907 <function>put_user()</function>
1917 </para> 1908 </para>
1918 </listitem> 1909 </listitem>
1919 </itemizedlist> 1910 </itemizedlist>
@@ -1927,13 +1918,13 @@ machines due to caching.
1927 1918
1928 <listitem> 1919 <listitem>
1929 <para> 1920 <para>
1930 <function>down_interruptible()</function> and 1921 <function>mutex_lock_interruptible()</function> and
1931 <function>down()</function> 1922 <function>mutex_lock()</function>
1932 </para> 1923 </para>
1933 <para> 1924 <para>
1934 There is a <function>down_trylock()</function> which can be 1925 There is a <function>mutex_trylock()</function> which can be
1935 used inside interrupt context, as it will not sleep. 1926 used inside interrupt context, as it will not sleep.
1936 <function>up()</function> will also never sleep. 1927 <function>mutex_unlock()</function> will also never sleep.
1937 </para> 1928 </para>
1938 </listitem> 1929 </listitem>
1939 </itemizedlist> 1930 </itemizedlist>
@@ -2023,7 +2014,7 @@ machines due to caching.
2023 <para> 2014 <para>
2024 Prior to 2.5, or when <symbol>CONFIG_PREEMPT</symbol> is 2015 Prior to 2.5, or when <symbol>CONFIG_PREEMPT</symbol> is
2025 unset, processes in user context inside the kernel would not 2016 unset, processes in user context inside the kernel would not
2026 preempt each other (ie. you had that CPU until you have it up, 2017 preempt each other (ie. you had that CPU until you gave it up,
2027 except for interrupts). With the addition of 2018 except for interrupts). With the addition of
2028 <symbol>CONFIG_PREEMPT</symbol> in 2.5.4, this changed: when 2019 <symbol>CONFIG_PREEMPT</symbol> in 2.5.4, this changed: when
2029 in user context, higher priority tasks can "cut in": spinlocks 2020 in user context, higher priority tasks can "cut in": spinlocks
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl
index 1fd6a1ec7591..8a5dc6e021ff 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/procfs-guide.tmpl
@@ -29,12 +29,12 @@
29 29
30 <revhistory> 30 <revhistory>
31 <revision> 31 <revision>
32 <revnumber>1.0&nbsp;</revnumber> 32 <revnumber>1.0</revnumber>
33 <date>May 30, 2001</date> 33 <date>May 30, 2001</date>
34 <revremark>Initial revision posted to linux-kernel</revremark> 34 <revremark>Initial revision posted to linux-kernel</revremark>
35 </revision> 35 </revision>
36 <revision> 36 <revision>
37 <revnumber>1.1&nbsp;</revnumber> 37 <revnumber>1.1</revnumber>
38 <date>June 3, 2001</date> 38 <date>June 3, 2001</date>
39 <revremark>Revised after comments from linux-kernel</revremark> 39 <revremark>Revised after comments from linux-kernel</revremark>
40 </revision> 40 </revision>
diff --git a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
index fdd7f4f887b7..df87d1b93605 100644
--- a/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/DocBook/uio-howto.tmpl
@@ -21,6 +21,18 @@
21 </affiliation> 21 </affiliation>
22</author> 22</author>
23 23
24<copyright>
25 <year>2006-2008</year>
26 <holder>Hans-Jürgen Koch.</holder>
27</copyright>
28
29<legalnotice>
30<para>
31This documentation is Free Software licensed under the terms of the
32GPL version 2.
33</para>
34</legalnotice>
35
24<pubdate>2006-12-11</pubdate> 36<pubdate>2006-12-11</pubdate>
25 37
26<abstract> 38<abstract>
@@ -30,6 +42,12 @@
30 42
31<revhistory> 43<revhistory>
32 <revision> 44 <revision>
45 <revnumber>0.5</revnumber>
46 <date>2008-05-22</date>
47 <authorinitials>hjk</authorinitials>
48 <revremark>Added description of write() function.</revremark>
49 </revision>
50 <revision>
33 <revnumber>0.4</revnumber> 51 <revnumber>0.4</revnumber>
34 <date>2007-11-26</date> 52 <date>2007-11-26</date>
35 <authorinitials>hjk</authorinitials> 53 <authorinitials>hjk</authorinitials>
@@ -57,20 +75,9 @@
57</bookinfo> 75</bookinfo>
58 76
59<chapter id="aboutthisdoc"> 77<chapter id="aboutthisdoc">
60<?dbhtml filename="about.html"?> 78<?dbhtml filename="aboutthis.html"?>
61<title>About this document</title> 79<title>About this document</title>
62 80
63<sect1 id="copyright">
64<?dbhtml filename="copyright.html"?>
65<title>Copyright and License</title>
66<para>
67 Copyright (c) 2006 by Hans-Jürgen Koch.</para>
68<para>
69This documentation is Free Software licensed under the terms of the
70GPL version 2.
71</para>
72</sect1>
73
74<sect1 id="translations"> 81<sect1 id="translations">
75<?dbhtml filename="translations.html"?> 82<?dbhtml filename="translations.html"?>
76<title>Translations</title> 83<title>Translations</title>
@@ -189,6 +196,30 @@ interested in translating it, please email me
189 represents the total interrupt count. You can use this number 196 represents the total interrupt count. You can use this number
190 to figure out if you missed some interrupts. 197 to figure out if you missed some interrupts.
191 </para> 198 </para>
199 <para>
200 For some hardware that has more than one interrupt source internally,
201 but not separate IRQ mask and status registers, there might be
202 situations where userspace cannot determine what the interrupt source
203 was if the kernel handler disables them by writing to the chip's IRQ
204 register. In such a case, the kernel has to disable the IRQ completely
205 to leave the chip's register untouched. Now the userspace part can
206 determine the cause of the interrupt, but it cannot re-enable
207 interrupts. Another cornercase is chips where re-enabling interrupts
208 is a read-modify-write operation to a combined IRQ status/acknowledge
209 register. This would be racy if a new interrupt occurred
210 simultaneously.
211 </para>
212 <para>
213 To address these problems, UIO also implements a write() function. It
214 is normally not used and can be ignored for hardware that has only a
215 single interrupt source or has separate IRQ mask and status registers.
216 If you need it, however, a write to <filename>/dev/uioX</filename>
217 will call the <function>irqcontrol()</function> function implemented
218 by the driver. You have to write a 32-bit value that is usually either
219 0 or 1 to disable or enable interrupts. If a driver does not implement
220 <function>irqcontrol()</function>, <function>write()</function> will
221 return with <varname>-ENOSYS</varname>.
222 </para>
192 223
193 <para> 224 <para>
194 To handle interrupts properly, your custom kernel module can 225 To handle interrupts properly, your custom kernel module can
@@ -362,6 +393,14 @@ device is actually used.
362<function>open()</function>, you will probably also want a custom 393<function>open()</function>, you will probably also want a custom
363<function>release()</function> function. 394<function>release()</function> function.
364</para></listitem> 395</para></listitem>
396
397<listitem><para>
398<varname>int (*irqcontrol)(struct uio_info *info, s32 irq_on)
399</varname>: Optional. If you need to be able to enable or disable
400interrupts from userspace by writing to <filename>/dev/uioX</filename>,
401you can implement this function. The parameter <varname>irq_on</varname>
402will be 0 to disable interrupts and 1 to enable them.
403</para></listitem>
365</itemizedlist> 404</itemizedlist>
366 405
367<para> 406<para>
diff --git a/Documentation/HOWTO b/Documentation/HOWTO
index 619e8caf30db..c2371c5a98f9 100644
--- a/Documentation/HOWTO
+++ b/Documentation/HOWTO
@@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ Here is a list of some of the different kernel trees available:
358 - pcmcia, Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net> 358 - pcmcia, Dominik Brodowski <linux@dominikbrodowski.net>
359 git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git 359 git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/brodo/pcmcia-2.6.git
360 360
361 - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@SteelEye.com> 361 - SCSI, James Bottomley <James.Bottomley@hansenpartnership.com>
362 git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git 362 git.kernel.org:/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/jejb/scsi-misc-2.6.git
363 363
364 - x86, Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu> 364 - x86, Ingo Molnar <mingo@elte.hu>
diff --git a/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt b/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt
index c2321903aa09..21bc416d887e 100644
--- a/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt
+++ b/Documentation/Intel-IOMMU.txt
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ IOVA generation is pretty generic. We used the same technique as vmalloc()
48but these are not global address spaces, but separate for each domain. 48but these are not global address spaces, but separate for each domain.
49Different DMA engines may support different number of domains. 49Different DMA engines may support different number of domains.
50 50
51We also allocate gaurd pages with each mapping, so we can attempt to catch 51We also allocate guard pages with each mapping, so we can attempt to catch
52any overflow that might happen. 52any overflow that might happen.
53 53
54 54
@@ -112,4 +112,4 @@ TBD
112 112
113- For compatibility testing, could use unity map domain for all devices, just 113- For compatibility testing, could use unity map domain for all devices, just
114 provide a 1-1 for all useful memory under a single domain for all devices. 114 provide a 1-1 for all useful memory under a single domain for all devices.
115- API for paravirt ops for abstracting functionlity for VMM folks. 115- API for paravirt ops for abstracting functionality for VMM folks.
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt b/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt
index 1443cd71d263..8a12f0730c94 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt
@@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ the delays experienced by a task while
11a) waiting for a CPU (while being runnable) 11a) waiting for a CPU (while being runnable)
12b) completion of synchronous block I/O initiated by the task 12b) completion of synchronous block I/O initiated by the task
13c) swapping in pages 13c) swapping in pages
14d) memory reclaim
14 15
15and makes these statistics available to userspace through 16and makes these statistics available to userspace through
16the taskstats interface. 17the taskstats interface.
@@ -41,7 +42,7 @@ this structure. See
41 include/linux/taskstats.h 42 include/linux/taskstats.h
42for a description of the fields pertaining to delay accounting. 43for a description of the fields pertaining to delay accounting.
43It will generally be in the form of counters returning the cumulative 44It will generally be in the form of counters returning the cumulative
44delay seen for cpu, sync block I/O, swapin etc. 45delay seen for cpu, sync block I/O, swapin, memory reclaim etc.
45 46
46Taking the difference of two successive readings of a given 47Taking the difference of two successive readings of a given
47counter (say cpu_delay_total) for a task will give the delay 48counter (say cpu_delay_total) for a task will give the delay
@@ -94,7 +95,9 @@ CPU count real total virtual total delay total
94 7876 92005750 100000000 24001500 95 7876 92005750 100000000 24001500
95IO count delay total 96IO count delay total
96 0 0 97 0 0
97MEM count delay total 98SWAP count delay total
99 0 0
100RECLAIM count delay total
98 0 0 101 0 0
99 102
100Get delays seen in executing a given simple command 103Get delays seen in executing a given simple command
@@ -108,5 +111,7 @@ CPU count real total virtual total delay total
108 6 4000250 4000000 0 111 6 4000250 4000000 0
109IO count delay total 112IO count delay total
110 0 0 113 0 0
111MEM count delay total 114SWAP count delay total
115 0 0
116RECLAIM count delay total
112 0 0 117 0 0
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
index 40121b5cca14..3f7755f3963f 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/getdelays.c
@@ -196,14 +196,18 @@ void print_delayacct(struct taskstats *t)
196 " %15llu%15llu%15llu%15llu\n" 196 " %15llu%15llu%15llu%15llu\n"
197 "IO %15s%15s\n" 197 "IO %15s%15s\n"
198 " %15llu%15llu\n" 198 " %15llu%15llu\n"
199 "MEM %15s%15s\n" 199 "SWAP %15s%15s\n"
200 " %15llu%15llu\n"
201 "RECLAIM %12s%15s\n"
200 " %15llu%15llu\n", 202 " %15llu%15llu\n",
201 "count", "real total", "virtual total", "delay total", 203 "count", "real total", "virtual total", "delay total",
202 t->cpu_count, t->cpu_run_real_total, t->cpu_run_virtual_total, 204 t->cpu_count, t->cpu_run_real_total, t->cpu_run_virtual_total,
203 t->cpu_delay_total, 205 t->cpu_delay_total,
204 "count", "delay total", 206 "count", "delay total",
205 t->blkio_count, t->blkio_delay_total, 207 t->blkio_count, t->blkio_delay_total,
206 "count", "delay total", t->swapin_count, t->swapin_delay_total); 208 "count", "delay total", t->swapin_count, t->swapin_delay_total,
209 "count", "delay total",
210 t->freepages_count, t->freepages_delay_total);
207} 211}
208 212
209void task_context_switch_counts(struct taskstats *t) 213void task_context_switch_counts(struct taskstats *t)
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt b/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt
index cd784f46bf8a..e7512c061c15 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ This document contains an explanation of the struct taskstats fields.
6There are three different groups of fields in the struct taskstats: 6There are three different groups of fields in the struct taskstats:
7 7
81) Common and basic accounting fields 81) Common and basic accounting fields
9 If CONFIG_TASKSTATS is set, the taskstats inteface is enabled and 9 If CONFIG_TASKSTATS is set, the taskstats interface is enabled and
10 the common fields and basic accounting fields are collected for 10 the common fields and basic accounting fields are collected for
11 delivery at do_exit() of a task. 11 delivery at do_exit() of a task.
122) Delay accounting fields 122) Delay accounting fields
@@ -26,6 +26,8 @@ There are three different groups of fields in the struct taskstats:
26 26
275) Time accounting for SMT machines 275) Time accounting for SMT machines
28 28
296) Extended delay accounting fields for memory reclaim
30
29Future extension should add fields to the end of the taskstats struct, and 31Future extension should add fields to the end of the taskstats struct, and
30should not change the relative position of each field within the struct. 32should not change the relative position of each field within the struct.
31 33
@@ -170,4 +172,9 @@ struct taskstats {
170 __u64 ac_utimescaled; /* utime scaled on frequency etc */ 172 __u64 ac_utimescaled; /* utime scaled on frequency etc */
171 __u64 ac_stimescaled; /* stime scaled on frequency etc */ 173 __u64 ac_stimescaled; /* stime scaled on frequency etc */
172 __u64 cpu_scaled_run_real_total; /* scaled cpu_run_real_total */ 174 __u64 cpu_scaled_run_real_total; /* scaled cpu_run_real_total */
175
1766) Extended delay accounting fields for memory reclaim
177 /* Delay waiting for memory reclaim */
178 __u64 freepages_count;
179 __u64 freepages_delay_total;
173} 180}
diff --git a/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt b/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..d8297e4ebd26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/bt8xxgpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
1===============================================================
2== BT8XXGPIO driver ==
3== ==
4== A driver for a selfmade cheap BT8xx based PCI GPIO-card ==
5== ==
6== For advanced documentation, see ==
7== http://www.bu3sch.de/btgpio.php ==
8===============================================================
9
10
11A generic digital 24-port PCI GPIO card can be built out of an ordinary
12Brooktree bt848, bt849, bt878 or bt879 based analog TV tuner card. The
13Brooktree chip is used in old analog Hauppauge WinTV PCI cards. You can easily
14find them used for low prices on the net.
15
16The bt8xx chip does have 24 digital GPIO ports.
17These ports are accessible via 24 pins on the SMD chip package.
18
19
20==============================================
21== How to physically access the GPIO pins ==
22==============================================
23
24The are several ways to access these pins. One might unsolder the whole chip
25and put it on a custom PCI board, or one might only unsolder each individual
26GPIO pin and solder that to some tiny wire. As the chip package really is tiny
27there are some advanced soldering skills needed in any case.
28
29The physical pinouts are drawn in the following ASCII art.
30The GPIO pins are marked with G00-G23
31
32 G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G
33 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
34 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
35 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
36 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
37 --| ^ ^ |--
38 --| pin 86 pin 67 |--
39 --| |--
40 --| pin 61 > |-- G18
41 --| |-- G19
42 --| |-- G20
43 --| |-- G21
44 --| |-- G22
45 --| pin 56 > |-- G23
46 --| |--
47 --| Brooktree 878/879 |--
48 --| |--
49 --| |--
50 --| |--
51 --| |--
52 --| |--
53 --| |--
54 --| |--
55 --| |--
56 --| |--
57 --| |--
58 --| |--
59 --| |--
60 --| |--
61 --| O |--
62 --| |--
63 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
64 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
65 ^
66 This is pin 1
67
diff --git a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt
index 866b9cd9a959..9b53d5827361 100644
--- a/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/controllers/memory.txt
@@ -242,8 +242,7 @@ rmdir() if there are no tasks.
2421. Add support for accounting huge pages (as a separate controller) 2421. Add support for accounting huge pages (as a separate controller)
2432. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first 2432. Make per-cgroup scanner reclaim not-shared pages first
2443. Teach controller to account for shared-pages 2443. Teach controller to account for shared-pages
2454. Start reclamation when the limit is lowered 2454. Start reclamation in the background when the limit is
2465. Start reclamation in the background when the limit is
247 not yet hit but the usage is getting closer 246 not yet hit but the usage is getting closer
248 247
249Summary 248Summary
diff --git a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
index dcec0564d040..5b0cfa67aff9 100644
--- a/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cpu-freq/governors.txt
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ around '10000' or more.
122show_sampling_rate_(min|max): the minimum and maximum sampling rates 122show_sampling_rate_(min|max): the minimum and maximum sampling rates
123available that you may set 'sampling_rate' to. 123available that you may set 'sampling_rate' to.
124 124
125up_threshold: defines what the average CPU usaged between the samplings 125up_threshold: defines what the average CPU usage between the samplings
126of 'sampling_rate' needs to be for the kernel to make a decision on 126of 'sampling_rate' needs to be for the kernel to make a decision on
127whether it should increase the frequency. For example when it is set 127whether it should increase the frequency. For example when it is set
128to its default value of '80' it means that between the checking 128to its default value of '80' it means that between the checking
diff --git a/Documentation/edac.txt b/Documentation/edac.txt
index a5c36842ecef..8eda3fb66416 100644
--- a/Documentation/edac.txt
+++ b/Documentation/edac.txt
@@ -222,74 +222,9 @@ both csrow2 and csrow3 are populated, this indicates a dual ranked
222set of DIMMs for channels 0 and 1. 222set of DIMMs for channels 0 and 1.
223 223
224 224
225Within each of the 'mc','mcX' and 'csrowX' directories are several 225Within each of the 'mcX' and 'csrowX' directories are several
226EDAC control and attribute files. 226EDAC control and attribute files.
227 227
228
229============================================================================
230DIRECTORY 'mc'
231
232In directory 'mc' are EDAC system overall control and attribute files:
233
234
235Panic on UE control file:
236
237 'edac_mc_panic_on_ue'
238
239 An uncorrectable error will cause a machine panic. This is usually
240 desirable. It is a bad idea to continue when an uncorrectable error
241 occurs - it is indeterminate what was uncorrected and the operating
242 system context might be so mangled that continuing will lead to further
243 corruption. If the kernel has MCE configured, then EDAC will never
244 notice the UE.
245
246 LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: panic_on_ue=[0|1]
247
248 RUN TIME: echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_panic_on_ue
249
250
251Log UE control file:
252
253 'edac_mc_log_ue'
254
255 Generate kernel messages describing uncorrectable errors. These errors
256 are reported through the system message log system. UE statistics
257 will be accumulated even when UE logging is disabled.
258
259 LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: log_ue=[0|1]
260
261 RUN TIME: echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_log_ue
262
263
264Log CE control file:
265
266 'edac_mc_log_ce'
267
268 Generate kernel messages describing correctable errors. These
269 errors are reported through the system message log system.
270 CE statistics will be accumulated even when CE logging is disabled.
271
272 LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: log_ce=[0|1]
273
274 RUN TIME: echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_log_ce
275
276
277Polling period control file:
278
279 'edac_mc_poll_msec'
280
281 The time period, in milliseconds, for polling for error information.
282 Too small a value wastes resources. Too large a value might delay
283 necessary handling of errors and might loose valuable information for
284 locating the error. 1000 milliseconds (once each second) is the current
285 default. Systems which require all the bandwidth they can get, may
286 increase this.
287
288 LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: poll_msec=[0|1]
289
290 RUN TIME: echo "1000" >/sys/devices/system/edac/mc/edac_mc_poll_msec
291
292
293============================================================================ 228============================================================================
294'mcX' DIRECTORIES 229'mcX' DIRECTORIES
295 230
@@ -392,7 +327,7 @@ Sdram memory scrubbing rate:
392 'sdram_scrub_rate' 327 'sdram_scrub_rate'
393 328
394 Read/Write attribute file that controls memory scrubbing. The scrubbing 329 Read/Write attribute file that controls memory scrubbing. The scrubbing
395 rate is set by writing a minimum bandwith in bytes/sec to the attribute 330 rate is set by writing a minimum bandwidth in bytes/sec to the attribute
396 file. The rate will be translated to an internal value that gives at 331 file. The rate will be translated to an internal value that gives at
397 least the specified rate. 332 least the specified rate.
398 333
@@ -537,7 +472,6 @@ Channel 1 DIMM Label control file:
537 motherboard specific and determination of this information 472 motherboard specific and determination of this information
538 must occur in userland at this time. 473 must occur in userland at this time.
539 474
540
541============================================================================ 475============================================================================
542SYSTEM LOGGING 476SYSTEM LOGGING
543 477
@@ -570,7 +504,6 @@ error type, a notice of "no info" and then an optional,
570driver-specific error message. 504driver-specific error message.
571 505
572 506
573
574============================================================================ 507============================================================================
575PCI Bus Parity Detection 508PCI Bus Parity Detection
576 509
@@ -604,6 +537,74 @@ Enable/Disable PCI Parity checking control file:
604 echo "0" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/check_pci_parity 537 echo "0" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/check_pci_parity
605 538
606 539
540Parity Count:
541
542 'pci_parity_count'
543
544 This attribute file will display the number of parity errors that
545 have been detected.
546
547
548============================================================================
549MODULE PARAMETERS
550
551Panic on UE control file:
552
553 'edac_mc_panic_on_ue'
554
555 An uncorrectable error will cause a machine panic. This is usually
556 desirable. It is a bad idea to continue when an uncorrectable error
557 occurs - it is indeterminate what was uncorrected and the operating
558 system context might be so mangled that continuing will lead to further
559 corruption. If the kernel has MCE configured, then EDAC will never
560 notice the UE.
561
562 LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_panic_on_ue=[0|1]
563
564 RUN TIME: echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_panic_on_ue
565
566
567Log UE control file:
568
569 'edac_mc_log_ue'
570
571 Generate kernel messages describing uncorrectable errors. These errors
572 are reported through the system message log system. UE statistics
573 will be accumulated even when UE logging is disabled.
574
575 LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_log_ue=[0|1]
576
577 RUN TIME: echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_log_ue
578
579
580Log CE control file:
581
582 'edac_mc_log_ce'
583
584 Generate kernel messages describing correctable errors. These
585 errors are reported through the system message log system.
586 CE statistics will be accumulated even when CE logging is disabled.
587
588 LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_log_ce=[0|1]
589
590 RUN TIME: echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_log_ce
591
592
593Polling period control file:
594
595 'edac_mc_poll_msec'
596
597 The time period, in milliseconds, for polling for error information.
598 Too small a value wastes resources. Too large a value might delay
599 necessary handling of errors and might loose valuable information for
600 locating the error. 1000 milliseconds (once each second) is the current
601 default. Systems which require all the bandwidth they can get, may
602 increase this.
603
604 LOAD TIME: module/kernel parameter: edac_mc_poll_msec=[0|1]
605
606 RUN TIME: echo "1000" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_mc_poll_msec
607
607 608
608Panic on PCI PARITY Error: 609Panic on PCI PARITY Error:
609 610
@@ -614,21 +615,13 @@ Panic on PCI PARITY Error:
614 error has been detected. 615 error has been detected.
615 616
616 617
617 module/kernel parameter: panic_on_pci_parity=[0|1] 618 module/kernel parameter: edac_panic_on_pci_pe=[0|1]
618 619
619 Enable: 620 Enable:
620 echo "1" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/panic_on_pci_parity 621 echo "1" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_panic_on_pci_pe
621 622
622 Disable: 623 Disable:
623 echo "0" >/sys/devices/system/edac/pci/panic_on_pci_parity 624 echo "0" > /sys/module/edac_core/parameters/edac_panic_on_pci_pe
624
625
626Parity Count:
627
628 'pci_parity_count'
629
630 This attribute file will display the number of parity errors that
631 have been detected.
632 625
633 626
634 627
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt b/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c87bfe5c630a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
1SH7760/SH7763 integrated LCDC Framebuffer driver
2================================================
3
40. Overwiew
5-----------
6The SH7760/SH7763 have an integrated LCD Display controller (LCDC) which
7supports (in theory) resolutions ranging from 1x1 to 1024x1024,
8with color depths ranging from 1 to 16 bits, on STN, DSTN and TFT Panels.
9
10Caveats:
11* Framebuffer memory must be a large chunk allocated at the top
12 of Area3 (HW requirement). Because of this requirement you should NOT
13 make the driver a module since at runtime it may become impossible to
14 get a large enough contiguous chunk of memory.
15
16* The driver does not support changing resolution while loaded
17 (displays aren't hotpluggable anyway)
18
19* Heavy flickering may be observed
20 a) if you're using 15/16bit color modes at >= 640x480 px resolutions,
21 b) during PCMCIA (or any other slow bus) activity.
22
23* Rotation works only 90degress clockwise, and only if horizontal
24 resolution is <= 320 pixels.
25
26files: drivers/video/sh7760fb.c
27 include/asm-sh/sh7760fb.h
28 Documentation/fb/sh7760fb.txt
29
301. Platform setup
31-----------------
32SH7760:
33 Video data is fetched via the DMABRG DMA engine, so you have to
34 configure the SH DMAC for DMABRG mode (write 0x94808080 to the
35 DMARSRA register somewhere at boot).
36
37 PFC registers PCCR and PCDR must be set to peripheral mode.
38 (write zeros to both).
39
40The driver does NOT do the above for you since board setup is, well, job
41of the board setup code.
42
432. Panel definitions
44--------------------
45The LCDC must explicitly be told about the type of LCD panel
46attached. Data must be wrapped in a "struct sh7760fb_platdata" and
47passed to the driver as platform_data.
48
49Suggest you take a closer look at the SH7760 Manual, Section 30.
50(http://documentation.renesas.com/eng/products/mpumcu/e602291_sh7760.pdf)
51
52The following code illustrates what needs to be done to
53get the framebuffer working on a 640x480 TFT:
54
55====================== cut here ======================================
56
57#include <linux/fb.h>
58#include <asm/sh7760fb.h>
59
60/*
61 * NEC NL6440bc26-01 640x480 TFT
62 * dotclock 25175 kHz
63 * Xres 640 Yres 480
64 * Htotal 800 Vtotal 525
65 * HsynStart 656 VsynStart 490
66 * HsynLenn 30 VsynLenn 2
67 *
68 * The linux framebuffer layer does not use the syncstart/synclen
69 * values but right/left/upper/lower margin values. The comments
70 * for the x_margin explain how to calculate those from given
71 * panel sync timings.
72 */
73static struct fb_videomode nl6448bc26 = {
74 .name = "NL6448BC26",
75 .refresh = 60,
76 .xres = 640,
77 .yres = 480,
78 .pixclock = 39683, /* in picoseconds! */
79 .hsync_len = 30,
80 .vsync_len = 2,
81 .left_margin = 114, /* HTOT - (HSYNSLEN + HSYNSTART) */
82 .right_margin = 16, /* HSYNSTART - XRES */
83 .upper_margin = 33, /* VTOT - (VSYNLEN + VSYNSTART) */
84 .lower_margin = 10, /* VSYNSTART - YRES */
85 .sync = FB_SYNC_HOR_HIGH_ACT | FB_SYNC_VERT_HIGH_ACT,
86 .vmode = FB_VMODE_NONINTERLACED,
87 .flag = 0,
88};
89
90static struct sh7760fb_platdata sh7760fb_nl6448 = {
91 .def_mode = &nl6448bc26,
92 .ldmtr = LDMTR_TFT_COLOR_16, /* 16bit TFT panel */
93 .lddfr = LDDFR_8BPP, /* we want 8bit output */
94 .ldpmmr = 0x0070,
95 .ldpspr = 0x0500,
96 .ldaclnr = 0,
97 .ldickr = LDICKR_CLKSRC(LCDC_CLKSRC_EXTERNAL) |
98 LDICKR_CLKDIV(1),
99 .rotate = 0,
100 .novsync = 1,
101 .blank = NULL,
102};
103
104/* SH7760:
105 * 0xFE300800: 256 * 4byte xRGB palette ram
106 * 0xFE300C00: 42 bytes ctrl registers
107 */
108static struct resource sh7760_lcdc_res[] = {
109 [0] = {
110 .start = 0xFE300800,
111 .end = 0xFE300CFF,
112 .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM,
113 },
114 [1] = {
115 .start = 65,
116 .end = 65,
117 .flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ,
118 },
119};
120
121static struct platform_device sh7760_lcdc_dev = {
122 .dev = {
123 .platform_data = &sh7760fb_nl6448,
124 },
125 .name = "sh7760-lcdc",
126 .id = -1,
127 .resource = sh7760_lcdc_res,
128 .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(sh7760_lcdc_res),
129};
130
131====================== cut here ======================================
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt b/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt
index 8a6c8a43e6a3..45d9de5b13a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/fb/tridentfb.txt
@@ -3,11 +3,25 @@ Tridentfb is a framebuffer driver for some Trident chip based cards.
3The following list of chips is thought to be supported although not all are 3The following list of chips is thought to be supported although not all are
4tested: 4tested:
5 5
6those from the Image series with Cyber in their names - accelerated 6those from the TGUI series 9440/96XX and with Cyber in their names
7those with Blade in their names (Blade3D,CyberBlade...) - accelerated 7those from the Image series and with Cyber in their names
8the newer CyberBladeXP family - nonaccelerated 8those with Blade in their names (Blade3D,CyberBlade...)
9 9the newer CyberBladeXP family
10Only PCI/AGP based cards are supported, none of the older Tridents. 10
11All families are accelerated. Only PCI/AGP based cards are supported,
12none of the older Tridents.
13The driver supports 8, 16 and 32 bits per pixel depths.
14The TGUI family requires a line length to be power of 2 if acceleration
15is enabled. This means that range of possible resolutions and bpp is
16limited comparing to the range if acceleration is disabled (see list
17of parameters below).
18
19Known bugs:
201. The driver randomly locks up on 3DImage975 chip with acceleration
21 enabled. The same happens in X11 (Xorg).
222. The ramdac speeds require some more fine tuning. It is possible to
23 switch resolution which the chip does not support at some depths for
24 older chips.
11 25
12How to use it? 26How to use it?
13============== 27==============
@@ -17,12 +31,11 @@ video=tridentfb
17 31
18The parameters for tridentfb are concatenated with a ':' as in this example. 32The parameters for tridentfb are concatenated with a ':' as in this example.
19 33
20video=tridentfb:800x600,bpp=16,noaccel 34video=tridentfb:800x600-16@75,noaccel
21 35
22The second level parameters that tridentfb understands are: 36The second level parameters that tridentfb understands are:
23 37
24noaccel - turns off acceleration (when it doesn't work for your card) 38noaccel - turns off acceleration (when it doesn't work for your card)
25accel - force text acceleration (for boards which by default are noacceled)
26 39
27fp - use flat panel related stuff 40fp - use flat panel related stuff
28crt - assume monitor is present instead of fp 41crt - assume monitor is present instead of fp
@@ -31,21 +44,24 @@ center - for flat panels and resolutions smaller than native size center the
31 image, otherwise use 44 image, otherwise use
32stretch 45stretch
33 46
34memsize - integer value in Kb, use if your card's memory size is misdetected. 47memsize - integer value in KB, use if your card's memory size is misdetected.
35 look at the driver output to see what it says when initializing. 48 look at the driver output to see what it says when initializing.
36memdiff - integer value in Kb,should be nonzero if your card reports 49
37 more memory than it actually has.For instance mine is 192K less than 50memdiff - integer value in KB, should be nonzero if your card reports
51 more memory than it actually has. For instance mine is 192K less than
38 detection says in all three BIOS selectable situations 2M, 4M, 8M. 52 detection says in all three BIOS selectable situations 2M, 4M, 8M.
39 Only use if your video memory is taken from main memory hence of 53 Only use if your video memory is taken from main memory hence of
40 configurable size.Otherwise use memsize. 54 configurable size. Otherwise use memsize.
41 If in some modes which barely fit the memory you see garbage at the bottom 55 If in some modes which barely fit the memory you see garbage
42 this might help by not letting change to that mode anymore. 56 at the bottom this might help by not letting change to that mode
57 anymore.
43 58
44nativex - the width in pixels of the flat panel.If you know it (usually 1024 59nativex - the width in pixels of the flat panel.If you know it (usually 1024
45 800 or 1280) and it is not what the driver seems to detect use it. 60 800 or 1280) and it is not what the driver seems to detect use it.
46 61
47bpp - bits per pixel (8,16 or 32) 62bpp - bits per pixel (8,16 or 32)
48mode - a mode name like 800x600 (as described in Documentation/fb/modedb.txt) 63mode - a mode name like 800x600-8@75 as described in
64 Documentation/fb/modedb.txt
49 65
50Using insane values for the above parameters will probably result in driver 66Using insane values for the above parameters will probably result in driver
51misbehaviour so take care(for instance memsize=12345678 or memdiff=23784 or 67misbehaviour so take care(for instance memsize=12345678 or memdiff=23784 or
diff --git a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
index 65a1482457a8..721c71b86e06 100644
--- a/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
+++ b/Documentation/feature-removal-schedule.txt
@@ -138,24 +138,6 @@ Who: Kay Sievers <kay.sievers@suse.de>
138 138
139--------------------------- 139---------------------------
140 140
141What: find_task_by_pid
142When: 2.6.26
143Why: With pid namespaces, calling this funciton will return the
144 wrong task when called from inside a namespace.
145
146 The best way to save a task pid and find a task by this
147 pid later, is to find this task's struct pid pointer (or get
148 it directly from the task) and call pid_task() later.
149
150 If someone really needs to get a task by its pid_t, then
151 he most likely needs the find_task_by_vpid() to get the
152 task from the same namespace as the current task is in, but
153 this may be not so in general.
154
155Who: Pavel Emelyanov <xemul@openvz.org>
156
157---------------------------
158
159What: ACPI procfs interface 141What: ACPI procfs interface
160When: July 2008 142When: July 2008
161Why: ACPI sysfs conversion should be finished by January 2008. 143Why: ACPI sysfs conversion should be finished by January 2008.
@@ -300,11 +282,15 @@ Who: ocfs2-devel@oss.oracle.com
300 282
301--------------------------- 283---------------------------
302 284
303What: asm/semaphore.h 285What: SCTP_GET_PEER_ADDRS_NUM_OLD, SCTP_GET_PEER_ADDRS_OLD,
304When: 2.6.26 286 SCTP_GET_LOCAL_ADDRS_NUM_OLD, SCTP_GET_LOCAL_ADDRS_OLD
305Why: Implementation became generic; users should now include 287When: June 2009
306 linux/semaphore.h instead. 288Why: A newer version of the options have been introduced in 2005 that
307Who: Matthew Wilcox <willy@linux.intel.com> 289 removes the limitions of the old API. The sctp library has been
290 converted to use these new options at the same time. Any user
291 space app that directly uses the old options should convert to using
292 the new options.
293Who: Vlad Yasevich <vladislav.yasevich@hp.com>
308 294
309--------------------------- 295---------------------------
310 296
@@ -314,3 +300,23 @@ Why: This option was introduced just to allow older lm-sensors userspace
314 to keep working over the upgrade to 2.6.26. At the scheduled time of 300 to keep working over the upgrade to 2.6.26. At the scheduled time of
315 removal fixed lm-sensors (2.x or 3.x) should be readily available. 301 removal fixed lm-sensors (2.x or 3.x) should be readily available.
316Who: Rene Herman <rene.herman@gmail.com> 302Who: Rene Herman <rene.herman@gmail.com>
303
304---------------------------
305
306What: Code that is now under CONFIG_WIRELESS_EXT_SYSFS
307 (in net/core/net-sysfs.c)
308When: After the only user (hal) has seen a release with the patches
309 for enough time, probably some time in 2010.
310Why: Over 1K .text/.data size reduction, data is available in other
311 ways (ioctls)
312Who: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
313
314---------------------------
315
316What: CONFIG_NF_CT_ACCT
317When: 2.6.29
318Why: Accounting can now be enabled/disabled without kernel recompilation.
319 Currently used only to set a default value for a feature that is also
320 controlled by a kernel/module/sysfs/sysctl parameter.
321Who: Krzysztof Piotr Oledzki <ole@ans.pl>
322
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
index 8b22d7d8b991..680fb566b928 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/Locking
@@ -510,6 +510,7 @@ prototypes:
510 void (*close)(struct vm_area_struct*); 510 void (*close)(struct vm_area_struct*);
511 int (*fault)(struct vm_area_struct*, struct vm_fault *); 511 int (*fault)(struct vm_area_struct*, struct vm_fault *);
512 int (*page_mkwrite)(struct vm_area_struct *, struct page *); 512 int (*page_mkwrite)(struct vm_area_struct *, struct page *);
513 int (*access)(struct vm_area_struct *, unsigned long, void*, int, int);
513 514
514locking rules: 515locking rules:
515 BKL mmap_sem PageLocked(page) 516 BKL mmap_sem PageLocked(page)
@@ -517,6 +518,7 @@ open: no yes
517close: no yes 518close: no yes
518fault: no yes 519fault: no yes
519page_mkwrite: no yes no 520page_mkwrite: no yes no
521access: no yes
520 522
521 ->page_mkwrite() is called when a previously read-only page is 523 ->page_mkwrite() is called when a previously read-only page is
522about to become writeable. The file system is responsible for 524about to become writeable. The file system is responsible for
@@ -525,6 +527,11 @@ taking to lock out truncate, the page range should be verified to be
525within i_size. The page mapping should also be checked that it is not 527within i_size. The page mapping should also be checked that it is not
526NULL. 528NULL.
527 529
530 ->access() is called when get_user_pages() fails in
531acces_process_vm(), typically used to debug a process through
532/proc/pid/mem or ptrace. This function is needed only for
533VM_IO | VM_PFNMAP VMAs.
534
528================================================================================ 535================================================================================
529 Dubious stuff 536 Dubious stuff
530 537
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/bfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/bfs.txt
index ea825e178e79..78043d5a8fc3 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/bfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/bfs.txt
@@ -26,11 +26,11 @@ You can simplify mounting by just typing:
26 26
27this will allocate the first available loopback device (and load loop.o 27this will allocate the first available loopback device (and load loop.o
28kernel module if necessary) automatically. If the loopback driver is not 28kernel module if necessary) automatically. If the loopback driver is not
29loaded automatically, make sure that your kernel is compiled with kmod 29loaded automatically, make sure that you have compiled the module and
30support (CONFIG_KMOD) enabled. Beware that umount will not 30that modprobe is functioning. Beware that umount will not deallocate
31deallocate /dev/loopN device if /etc/mtab file on your system is a 31/dev/loopN device if /etc/mtab file on your system is a symbolic link to
32symbolic link to /proc/mounts. You will need to do it manually using 32/proc/mounts. You will need to do it manually using "-d" switch of
33"-d" switch of losetup(8). Read losetup(8) manpage for more info. 33losetup(8). Read losetup(8) manpage for more info.
34 34
35To create the BFS image under UnixWare you need to find out first which 35To create the BFS image under UnixWare you need to find out first which
36slice contains it. The command prtvtoc(1M) is your friend: 36slice contains it. The command prtvtoc(1M) is your friend:
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt
index 15838d706ea2..44c97e6accb2 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt
@@ -233,12 +233,10 @@ accomplished via the group operations specified on the group's
233config_item_type. 233config_item_type.
234 234
235 struct configfs_group_operations { 235 struct configfs_group_operations {
236 int (*make_item)(struct config_group *group, 236 struct config_item *(*make_item)(struct config_group *group,
237 const char *name, 237 const char *name);
238 struct config_item **new_item); 238 struct config_group *(*make_group)(struct config_group *group,
239 int (*make_group)(struct config_group *group, 239 const char *name);
240 const char *name,
241 struct config_group **new_group);
242 int (*commit_item)(struct config_item *item); 240 int (*commit_item)(struct config_item *item);
243 void (*disconnect_notify)(struct config_group *group, 241 void (*disconnect_notify)(struct config_group *group,
244 struct config_item *item); 242 struct config_item *item);
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c
index 0b422acd470c..039648791701 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs_example.c
@@ -273,13 +273,13 @@ static inline struct simple_children *to_simple_children(struct config_item *ite
273 return item ? container_of(to_config_group(item), struct simple_children, group) : NULL; 273 return item ? container_of(to_config_group(item), struct simple_children, group) : NULL;
274} 274}
275 275
276static int simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group, const char *name, struct config_item **new_item) 276static struct config_item *simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group, const char *name)
277{ 277{
278 struct simple_child *simple_child; 278 struct simple_child *simple_child;
279 279
280 simple_child = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_child), GFP_KERNEL); 280 simple_child = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_child), GFP_KERNEL);
281 if (!simple_child) 281 if (!simple_child)
282 return -ENOMEM; 282 return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
283 283
284 284
285 config_item_init_type_name(&simple_child->item, name, 285 config_item_init_type_name(&simple_child->item, name,
@@ -287,8 +287,7 @@ static int simple_children_make_item(struct config_group *group, const char *nam
287 287
288 simple_child->storeme = 0; 288 simple_child->storeme = 0;
289 289
290 *new_item = &simple_child->item; 290 return &simple_child->item;
291 return 0;
292} 291}
293 292
294static struct configfs_attribute simple_children_attr_description = { 293static struct configfs_attribute simple_children_attr_description = {
@@ -360,21 +359,20 @@ static struct configfs_subsystem simple_children_subsys = {
360 * children of its own. 359 * children of its own.
361 */ 360 */
362 361
363static int group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group, const char *name, struct config_group **new_group) 362static struct config_group *group_children_make_group(struct config_group *group, const char *name)
364{ 363{
365 struct simple_children *simple_children; 364 struct simple_children *simple_children;
366 365
367 simple_children = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_children), 366 simple_children = kzalloc(sizeof(struct simple_children),
368 GFP_KERNEL); 367 GFP_KERNEL);
369 if (!simple_children) 368 if (!simple_children)
370 return -ENOMEM; 369 return ERR_PTR(-ENOMEM);
371 370
372 371
373 config_group_init_type_name(&simple_children->group, name, 372 config_group_init_type_name(&simple_children->group, name,
374 &simple_children_type); 373 &simple_children_type);
375 374
376 *new_group = &simple_children->group; 375 return &simple_children->group;
377 return 0;
378} 376}
379 377
380static struct configfs_attribute group_children_attr_description = { 378static struct configfs_attribute group_children_attr_description = {
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs-rdma.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs-rdma.txt
index d0ec45ae4e7d..44bd766f2e5d 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs-rdma.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs-rdma.txt
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
5################################################################################ 5################################################################################
6 6
7 Author: NetApp and Open Grid Computing 7 Author: NetApp and Open Grid Computing
8 Date: April 15, 2008 8 Date: May 29, 2008
9 9
10Table of Contents 10Table of Contents
11~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 11~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -60,16 +60,18 @@ Installation
60 The procedures described in this document have been tested with 60 The procedures described in this document have been tested with
61 distributions from Red Hat's Fedora Project (http://fedora.redhat.com/). 61 distributions from Red Hat's Fedora Project (http://fedora.redhat.com/).
62 62
63 - Install nfs-utils-1.1.1 or greater on the client 63 - Install nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater on the client
64 64
65 An NFS/RDMA mount point can only be obtained by using the mount.nfs 65 An NFS/RDMA mount point can be obtained by using the mount.nfs command in
66 command in nfs-utils-1.1.1 or greater. To see which version of mount.nfs 66 nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater (nfs-utils-1.1.1 was the first nfs-utils
67 you are using, type: 67 version with support for NFS/RDMA mounts, but for various reasons we
68 recommend using nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater). To see which version of
69 mount.nfs you are using, type:
68 70
69 > /sbin/mount.nfs -V 71 $ /sbin/mount.nfs -V
70 72
71 If the version is less than 1.1.1 or the command does not exist, 73 If the version is less than 1.1.2 or the command does not exist,
72 then you will need to install the latest version of nfs-utils. 74 you should install the latest version of nfs-utils.
73 75
74 Download the latest package from: 76 Download the latest package from:
75 77
@@ -77,22 +79,33 @@ Installation
77 79
78 Uncompress the package and follow the installation instructions. 80 Uncompress the package and follow the installation instructions.
79 81
80 If you will not be using GSS and NFSv4, the installation process 82 If you will not need the idmapper and gssd executables (you do not need
81 can be simplified by disabling these features when running configure: 83 these to create an NFS/RDMA enabled mount command), the installation
84 process can be simplified by disabling these features when running
85 configure:
82 86
83 > ./configure --disable-gss --disable-nfsv4 87 $ ./configure --disable-gss --disable-nfsv4
84 88
85 For more information on this see the package's README and INSTALL files. 89 To build nfs-utils you will need the tcp_wrappers package installed. For
90 more information on this see the package's README and INSTALL files.
86 91
87 After building the nfs-utils package, there will be a mount.nfs binary in 92 After building the nfs-utils package, there will be a mount.nfs binary in
88 the utils/mount directory. This binary can be used to initiate NFS v2, v3, 93 the utils/mount directory. This binary can be used to initiate NFS v2, v3,
89 or v4 mounts. To initiate a v4 mount, the binary must be called mount.nfs4. 94 or v4 mounts. To initiate a v4 mount, the binary must be called
90 The standard technique is to create a symlink called mount.nfs4 to mount.nfs. 95 mount.nfs4. The standard technique is to create a symlink called
96 mount.nfs4 to mount.nfs.
91 97
92 NOTE: mount.nfs and therefore nfs-utils-1.1.1 or greater is only needed 98 This mount.nfs binary should be installed at /sbin/mount.nfs as follows:
99
100 $ sudo cp utils/mount/mount.nfs /sbin/mount.nfs
101
102 In this location, mount.nfs will be invoked automatically for NFS mounts
103 by the system mount commmand.
104
105 NOTE: mount.nfs and therefore nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater is only needed
93 on the NFS client machine. You do not need this specific version of 106 on the NFS client machine. You do not need this specific version of
94 nfs-utils on the server. Furthermore, only the mount.nfs command from 107 nfs-utils on the server. Furthermore, only the mount.nfs command from
95 nfs-utils-1.1.1 is needed on the client. 108 nfs-utils-1.1.2 is needed on the client.
96 109
97 - Install a Linux kernel with NFS/RDMA 110 - Install a Linux kernel with NFS/RDMA
98 111
@@ -156,8 +169,8 @@ Check RDMA and NFS Setup
156 this time. For example, if you are using a Mellanox Tavor/Sinai/Arbel 169 this time. For example, if you are using a Mellanox Tavor/Sinai/Arbel
157 card: 170 card:
158 171
159 > modprobe ib_mthca 172 $ modprobe ib_mthca
160 > modprobe ib_ipoib 173 $ modprobe ib_ipoib
161 174
162 If you are using InfiniBand, make sure there is a Subnet Manager (SM) 175 If you are using InfiniBand, make sure there is a Subnet Manager (SM)
163 running on the network. If your IB switch has an embedded SM, you can 176 running on the network. If your IB switch has an embedded SM, you can
@@ -166,7 +179,7 @@ Check RDMA and NFS Setup
166 179
167 If an SM is running on your network, you should see the following: 180 If an SM is running on your network, you should see the following:
168 181
169 > cat /sys/class/infiniband/driverX/ports/1/state 182 $ cat /sys/class/infiniband/driverX/ports/1/state
170 4: ACTIVE 183 4: ACTIVE
171 184
172 where driverX is mthca0, ipath5, ehca3, etc. 185 where driverX is mthca0, ipath5, ehca3, etc.
@@ -174,10 +187,10 @@ Check RDMA and NFS Setup
174 To further test the InfiniBand software stack, use IPoIB (this 187 To further test the InfiniBand software stack, use IPoIB (this
175 assumes you have two IB hosts named host1 and host2): 188 assumes you have two IB hosts named host1 and host2):
176 189
177 host1> ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.x 190 host1$ ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.x
178 host2> ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.y 191 host2$ ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.y
179 host1> ping a.b.c.y 192 host1$ ping a.b.c.y
180 host2> ping a.b.c.x 193 host2$ ping a.b.c.x
181 194
182 For other device types, follow the appropriate procedures. 195 For other device types, follow the appropriate procedures.
183 196
@@ -202,11 +215,11 @@ NFS/RDMA Setup
202 /vol0 192.168.0.47(fsid=0,rw,async,insecure,no_root_squash) 215 /vol0 192.168.0.47(fsid=0,rw,async,insecure,no_root_squash)
203 /vol0 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0(fsid=0,rw,async,insecure,no_root_squash) 216 /vol0 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0(fsid=0,rw,async,insecure,no_root_squash)
204 217
205 The IP address(es) is(are) the client's IPoIB address for an InfiniBand HCA or the 218 The IP address(es) is(are) the client's IPoIB address for an InfiniBand
206 cleint's iWARP address(es) for an RNIC. 219 HCA or the cleint's iWARP address(es) for an RNIC.
207 220
208 NOTE: The "insecure" option must be used because the NFS/RDMA client does not 221 NOTE: The "insecure" option must be used because the NFS/RDMA client does
209 use a reserved port. 222 not use a reserved port.
210 223
211 Each time a machine boots: 224 Each time a machine boots:
212 225
@@ -214,43 +227,45 @@ NFS/RDMA Setup
214 227
215 For InfiniBand using a Mellanox adapter: 228 For InfiniBand using a Mellanox adapter:
216 229
217 > modprobe ib_mthca 230 $ modprobe ib_mthca
218 > modprobe ib_ipoib 231 $ modprobe ib_ipoib
219 > ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.d 232 $ ifconfig ib0 a.b.c.d
220 233
221 NOTE: use unique addresses for the client and server 234 NOTE: use unique addresses for the client and server
222 235
223 - Start the NFS server 236 - Start the NFS server
224 237
225 If the NFS/RDMA server was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in kernel config), 238 If the NFS/RDMA server was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in
226 load the RDMA transport module: 239 kernel config), load the RDMA transport module:
227 240
228 > modprobe svcrdma 241 $ modprobe svcrdma
229 242
230 Regardless of how the server was built (module or built-in), start the server: 243 Regardless of how the server was built (module or built-in), start the
244 server:
231 245
232 > /etc/init.d/nfs start 246 $ /etc/init.d/nfs start
233 247
234 or 248 or
235 249
236 > service nfs start 250 $ service nfs start
237 251
238 Instruct the server to listen on the RDMA transport: 252 Instruct the server to listen on the RDMA transport:
239 253
240 > echo rdma 2050 > /proc/fs/nfsd/portlist 254 $ echo rdma 2050 > /proc/fs/nfsd/portlist
241 255
242 - On the client system 256 - On the client system
243 257
244 If the NFS/RDMA client was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in kernel config), 258 If the NFS/RDMA client was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in
245 load the RDMA client module: 259 kernel config), load the RDMA client module:
246 260
247 > modprobe xprtrdma.ko 261 $ modprobe xprtrdma.ko
248 262
249 Regardless of how the client was built (module or built-in), issue the mount.nfs command: 263 Regardless of how the client was built (module or built-in), use this
264 command to mount the NFS/RDMA server:
250 265
251 > /path/to/your/mount.nfs <IPoIB-server-name-or-address>:/<export> /mnt -i -o rdma,port=2050 266 $ mount -o rdma,port=2050 <IPoIB-server-name-or-address>:/<export> /mnt
252 267
253 To verify that the mount is using RDMA, run "cat /proc/mounts" and check the 268 To verify that the mount is using RDMA, run "cat /proc/mounts" and check
254 "proto" field for the given mount. 269 the "proto" field for the given mount.
255 270
256 Congratulations! You're using NFS/RDMA! 271 Congratulations! You're using NFS/RDMA!
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1d0d41ff5c65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/omfs.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
1Optimized MPEG Filesystem (OMFS)
2
3Overview
4========
5
6OMFS is a filesystem created by SonicBlue for use in the ReplayTV DVR
7and Rio Karma MP3 player. The filesystem is extent-based, utilizing
8block sizes from 2k to 8k, with hash-based directories. This
9filesystem driver may be used to read and write disks from these
10devices.
11
12Note, it is not recommended that this FS be used in place of a general
13filesystem for your own streaming media device. Native Linux filesystems
14will likely perform better.
15
16More information is available at:
17
18 http://linux-karma.sf.net/
19
20Various utilities, including mkomfs and omfsck, are included with
21omfsprogs, available at:
22
23 http://bobcopeland.com/karma/
24
25Instructions are included in its README.
26
27Options
28=======
29
30OMFS supports the following mount-time options:
31
32 uid=n - make all files owned by specified user
33 gid=n - make all files owned by specified group
34 umask=xxx - set permission umask to xxx
35 fmask=xxx - set umask to xxx for files
36 dmask=xxx - set umask to xxx for directories
37
38Disk format
39===========
40
41OMFS discriminates between "sysblocks" and normal data blocks. The sysblock
42group consists of super block information, file metadata, directory structures,
43and extents. Each sysblock has a header containing CRCs of the entire
44sysblock, and may be mirrored in successive blocks on the disk. A sysblock may
45have a smaller size than a data block, but since they are both addressed by the
46same 64-bit block number, any remaining space in the smaller sysblock is
47unused.
48
49Sysblock header information:
50
51struct omfs_header {
52 __be64 h_self; /* FS block where this is located */
53 __be32 h_body_size; /* size of useful data after header */
54 __be16 h_crc; /* crc-ccitt of body_size bytes */
55 char h_fill1[2];
56 u8 h_version; /* version, always 1 */
57 char h_type; /* OMFS_INODE_X */
58 u8 h_magic; /* OMFS_IMAGIC */
59 u8 h_check_xor; /* XOR of header bytes before this */
60 __be32 h_fill2;
61};
62
63Files and directories are both represented by omfs_inode:
64
65struct omfs_inode {
66 struct omfs_header i_head; /* header */
67 __be64 i_parent; /* parent containing this inode */
68 __be64 i_sibling; /* next inode in hash bucket */
69 __be64 i_ctime; /* ctime, in milliseconds */
70 char i_fill1[35];
71 char i_type; /* OMFS_[DIR,FILE] */
72 __be32 i_fill2;
73 char i_fill3[64];
74 char i_name[OMFS_NAMELEN]; /* filename */
75 __be64 i_size; /* size of file, in bytes */
76};
77
78Directories in OMFS are implemented as a large hash table. Filenames are
79hashed then prepended into the bucket list beginning at OMFS_DIR_START.
80Lookup requires hashing the filename, then seeking across i_sibling pointers
81until a match is found on i_name. Empty buckets are represented by block
82pointers with all-1s (~0).
83
84A file is an omfs_inode structure followed by an extent table beginning at
85OMFS_EXTENT_START:
86
87struct omfs_extent_entry {
88 __be64 e_cluster; /* start location of a set of blocks */
89 __be64 e_blocks; /* number of blocks after e_cluster */
90};
91
92struct omfs_extent {
93 __be64 e_next; /* next extent table location */
94 __be32 e_extent_count; /* total # extents in this table */
95 __be32 e_fill;
96 struct omfs_extent_entry e_entry; /* start of extent entries */
97};
98
99Each extent holds the block offset followed by number of blocks allocated to
100the extent. The final extent in each table is a terminator with e_cluster
101being ~0 and e_blocks being ones'-complement of the total number of blocks
102in the table.
103
104If this table overflows, a continuation inode is written and pointed to by
105e_next. These have a header but lack the rest of the inode structure.
106
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
index 7f268f327d75..64557821ee59 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/proc.txt
@@ -296,6 +296,7 @@ Table 1-4: Kernel info in /proc
296 uptime System uptime 296 uptime System uptime
297 version Kernel version 297 version Kernel version
298 video bttv info of video resources (2.4) 298 video bttv info of video resources (2.4)
299 vmallocinfo Show vmalloced areas
299.............................................................................. 300..............................................................................
300 301
301You can, for example, check which interrupts are currently in use and what 302You can, for example, check which interrupts are currently in use and what
@@ -557,6 +558,49 @@ VmallocTotal: total size of vmalloc memory area
557 VmallocUsed: amount of vmalloc area which is used 558 VmallocUsed: amount of vmalloc area which is used
558VmallocChunk: largest contigious block of vmalloc area which is free 559VmallocChunk: largest contigious block of vmalloc area which is free
559 560
561..............................................................................
562
563vmallocinfo:
564
565Provides information about vmalloced/vmaped areas. One line per area,
566containing the virtual address range of the area, size in bytes,
567caller information of the creator, and optional information depending
568on the kind of area :
569
570 pages=nr number of pages
571 phys=addr if a physical address was specified
572 ioremap I/O mapping (ioremap() and friends)
573 vmalloc vmalloc() area
574 vmap vmap()ed pages
575 user VM_USERMAP area
576 vpages buffer for pages pointers was vmalloced (huge area)
577 N<node>=nr (Only on NUMA kernels)
578 Number of pages allocated on memory node <node>
579
580> cat /proc/vmallocinfo
5810xffffc20000000000-0xffffc20000201000 2101248 alloc_large_system_hash+0x204 ...
582 /0x2c0 pages=512 vmalloc N0=128 N1=128 N2=128 N3=128
5830xffffc20000201000-0xffffc20000302000 1052672 alloc_large_system_hash+0x204 ...
584 /0x2c0 pages=256 vmalloc N0=64 N1=64 N2=64 N3=64
5850xffffc20000302000-0xffffc20000304000 8192 acpi_tb_verify_table+0x21/0x4f...
586 phys=7fee8000 ioremap
5870xffffc20000304000-0xffffc20000307000 12288 acpi_tb_verify_table+0x21/0x4f...
588 phys=7fee7000 ioremap
5890xffffc2000031d000-0xffffc2000031f000 8192 init_vdso_vars+0x112/0x210
5900xffffc2000031f000-0xffffc2000032b000 49152 cramfs_uncompress_init+0x2e ...
591 /0x80 pages=11 vmalloc N0=3 N1=3 N2=2 N3=3
5920xffffc2000033a000-0xffffc2000033d000 12288 sys_swapon+0x640/0xac0 ...
593 pages=2 vmalloc N1=2
5940xffffc20000347000-0xffffc2000034c000 20480 xt_alloc_table_info+0xfe ...
595 /0x130 [x_tables] pages=4 vmalloc N0=4
5960xffffffffa0000000-0xffffffffa000f000 61440 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
597 pages=14 vmalloc N2=14
5980xffffffffa000f000-0xffffffffa0014000 20480 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
599 pages=4 vmalloc N1=4
6000xffffffffa0014000-0xffffffffa0017000 12288 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
601 pages=2 vmalloc N1=2
6020xffffffffa0017000-0xffffffffa0022000 45056 sys_init_module+0xc27/0x1d00 ...
603 pages=10 vmalloc N0=10
560 604
5611.3 IDE devices in /proc/ide 6051.3 IDE devices in /proc/ide
562---------------------------- 606----------------------------
@@ -887,7 +931,7 @@ group_prealloc max_to_scan mb_groups mb_history min_to_scan order2_req
887stats stream_req 931stats stream_req
888 932
889mb_groups: 933mb_groups:
890This file gives the details of mutiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks 934This file gives the details of multiblock allocator buddy cache of free blocks
891 935
892mb_history: 936mb_history:
893Multiblock allocation history. 937Multiblock allocation history.
@@ -1430,7 +1474,7 @@ used because pages_free(1355) is smaller than watermark + protection[2]
1430normal page requirement. If requirement is DMA zone(index=0), protection[0] 1474normal page requirement. If requirement is DMA zone(index=0), protection[0]
1431(=0) is used. 1475(=0) is used.
1432 1476
1433zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following exprssion. 1477zone[i]'s protection[j] is calculated by following expression.
1434 1478
1435(i < j): 1479(i < j):
1436 zone[i]->protection[j] 1480 zone[i]->protection[j]
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt
index 094f2d2f38b1..510b722667ac 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/relay.txt
@@ -294,6 +294,16 @@ user-defined data with a channel, and is immediately available
294(including in create_buf_file()) via chan->private_data or 294(including in create_buf_file()) via chan->private_data or
295buf->chan->private_data. 295buf->chan->private_data.
296 296
297Buffer-only channels
298--------------------
299
300These channels have no files associated and can be created with
301relay_open(NULL, NULL, ...). Such channels are useful in scenarios such
302as when doing early tracing in the kernel, before the VFS is up. In these
303cases, one may open a buffer-only channel and then call
304relay_late_setup_files() when the kernel is ready to handle files,
305to expose the buffered data to the userspace.
306
297Channel 'modes' 307Channel 'modes'
298--------------- 308---------------
299 309
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
index 7f27b8f840d0..9e9c348275a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt
@@ -248,6 +248,7 @@ The top level sysfs directory looks like:
248block/ 248block/
249bus/ 249bus/
250class/ 250class/
251dev/
251devices/ 252devices/
252firmware/ 253firmware/
253net/ 254net/
@@ -274,6 +275,11 @@ fs/ contains a directory for some filesystems. Currently each
274filesystem wanting to export attributes must create its own hierarchy 275filesystem wanting to export attributes must create its own hierarchy
275below fs/ (see ./fuse.txt for an example). 276below fs/ (see ./fuse.txt for an example).
276 277
278dev/ contains two directories char/ and block/. Inside these two
279directories there are symlinks named <major>:<minor>. These symlinks
280point to the sysfs directory for the given device. /sys/dev provides a
281quick way to lookup the sysfs interface for a device from the result of
282a stat(2) operation.
277 283
278More information can driver-model specific features can be found in 284More information can driver-model specific features can be found in
279Documentation/driver-model/. 285Documentation/driver-model/.
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt
index 2d5e1e582e13..bbac4f1d9056 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt
@@ -96,6 +96,14 @@ shortname=lower|win95|winnt|mixed
96 emulate the Windows 95 rule for create. 96 emulate the Windows 95 rule for create.
97 Default setting is `lower'. 97 Default setting is `lower'.
98 98
99tz=UTC -- Interpret timestamps as UTC rather than local time.
100 This option disables the conversion of timestamps
101 between local time (as used by Windows on FAT) and UTC
102 (which Linux uses internally). This is particuluarly
103 useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras)
104 that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of
105 local time.
106
99<bool>: 0,1,yes,no,true,false 107<bool>: 0,1,yes,no,true,false
100 108
101TODO 109TODO
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
index b7522c6cbae3..c4d348dabe94 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfs.txt
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ struct file_system_type {
143 143
144The get_sb() method has the following arguments: 144The get_sb() method has the following arguments:
145 145
146 struct file_system_type *fs_type: decribes the filesystem, partly initialized 146 struct file_system_type *fs_type: describes the filesystem, partly initialized
147 by the specific filesystem code 147 by the specific filesystem code
148 148
149 int flags: mount flags 149 int flags: mount flags
@@ -895,9 +895,9 @@ struct dentry_operations {
895 iput() yourself 895 iput() yourself
896 896
897 d_dname: called when the pathname of a dentry should be generated. 897 d_dname: called when the pathname of a dentry should be generated.
898 Usefull for some pseudo filesystems (sockfs, pipefs, ...) to delay 898 Useful for some pseudo filesystems (sockfs, pipefs, ...) to delay
899 pathname generation. (Instead of doing it when dentry is created, 899 pathname generation. (Instead of doing it when dentry is created,
900 its done only when the path is needed.). Real filesystems probably 900 it's done only when the path is needed.). Real filesystems probably
901 dont want to use it, because their dentries are present in global 901 dont want to use it, because their dentries are present in global
902 dcache hash, so their hash should be an invariant. As no lock is 902 dcache hash, so their hash should be an invariant. As no lock is
903 held, d_dname() should not try to modify the dentry itself, unless 903 held, d_dname() should not try to modify the dentry itself, unless
diff --git a/Documentation/gpio.txt b/Documentation/gpio.txt
index c35ca9e40d4c..18022e249c53 100644
--- a/Documentation/gpio.txt
+++ b/Documentation/gpio.txt
@@ -347,15 +347,12 @@ necessarily be nonportable.
347Dynamic definition of GPIOs is not currently standard; for example, as 347Dynamic definition of GPIOs is not currently standard; for example, as
348a side effect of configuring an add-on board with some GPIO expanders. 348a side effect of configuring an add-on board with some GPIO expanders.
349 349
350These calls are purely for kernel space, but a userspace API could be built
351on top of them.
352
353 350
354GPIO implementor's framework (OPTIONAL) 351GPIO implementor's framework (OPTIONAL)
355======================================= 352=======================================
356As noted earlier, there is an optional implementation framework making it 353As noted earlier, there is an optional implementation framework making it
357easier for platforms to support different kinds of GPIO controller using 354easier for platforms to support different kinds of GPIO controller using
358the same programming interface. 355the same programming interface. This framework is called "gpiolib".
359 356
360As a debugging aid, if debugfs is available a /sys/kernel/debug/gpio file 357As a debugging aid, if debugfs is available a /sys/kernel/debug/gpio file
361will be found there. That will list all the controllers registered through 358will be found there. That will list all the controllers registered through
@@ -392,11 +389,21 @@ either NULL or the label associated with that GPIO when it was requested.
392 389
393Platform Support 390Platform Support
394---------------- 391----------------
395To support this framework, a platform's Kconfig will "select HAVE_GPIO_LIB" 392To support this framework, a platform's Kconfig will "select" either
393ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB or ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB
396and arrange that its <asm/gpio.h> includes <asm-generic/gpio.h> and defines 394and arrange that its <asm/gpio.h> includes <asm-generic/gpio.h> and defines
397three functions: gpio_get_value(), gpio_set_value(), and gpio_cansleep(). 395three functions: gpio_get_value(), gpio_set_value(), and gpio_cansleep().
398They may also want to provide a custom value for ARCH_NR_GPIOS. 396They may also want to provide a custom value for ARCH_NR_GPIOS.
399 397
398ARCH_REQUIRE_GPIOLIB means that the gpio-lib code will always get compiled
399into the kernel on that architecture.
400
401ARCH_WANT_OPTIONAL_GPIOLIB means the gpio-lib code defaults to off and the user
402can enable it and build it into the kernel optionally.
403
404If neither of these options are selected, the platform does not support
405GPIOs through GPIO-lib and the code cannot be enabled by the user.
406
400Trivial implementations of those functions can directly use framework 407Trivial implementations of those functions can directly use framework
401code, which always dispatches through the gpio_chip: 408code, which always dispatches through the gpio_chip:
402 409
@@ -439,4 +446,120 @@ becomes available. That may mean the device should not be registered until
439calls for that GPIO can work. One way to address such dependencies is for 446calls for that GPIO can work. One way to address such dependencies is for
440such gpio_chip controllers to provide setup() and teardown() callbacks to 447such gpio_chip controllers to provide setup() and teardown() callbacks to
441board specific code; those board specific callbacks would register devices 448board specific code; those board specific callbacks would register devices
442once all the necessary resources are available. 449once all the necessary resources are available, and remove them later when
450the GPIO controller device becomes unavailable.
451
452
453Sysfs Interface for Userspace (OPTIONAL)
454========================================
455Platforms which use the "gpiolib" implementors framework may choose to
456configure a sysfs user interface to GPIOs. This is different from the
457debugfs interface, since it provides control over GPIO direction and
458value instead of just showing a gpio state summary. Plus, it could be
459present on production systems without debugging support.
460
461Given approprate hardware documentation for the system, userspace could
462know for example that GPIO #23 controls the write protect line used to
463protect boot loader segments in flash memory. System upgrade procedures
464may need to temporarily remove that protection, first importing a GPIO,
465then changing its output state, then updating the code before re-enabling
466the write protection. In normal use, GPIO #23 would never be touched,
467and the kernel would have no need to know about it.
468
469Again depending on appropriate hardware documentation, on some systems
470userspace GPIO can be used to determine system configuration data that
471standard kernels won't know about. And for some tasks, simple userspace
472GPIO drivers could be all that the system really needs.
473
474Note that standard kernel drivers exist for common "LEDs and Buttons"
475GPIO tasks: "leds-gpio" and "gpio_keys", respectively. Use those
476instead of talking directly to the GPIOs; they integrate with kernel
477frameworks better than your userspace code could.
478
479
480Paths in Sysfs
481--------------
482There are three kinds of entry in /sys/class/gpio:
483
484 - Control interfaces used to get userspace control over GPIOs;
485
486 - GPIOs themselves; and
487
488 - GPIO controllers ("gpio_chip" instances).
489
490That's in addition to standard files including the "device" symlink.
491
492The control interfaces are write-only:
493
494 /sys/class/gpio/
495
496 "export" ... Userspace may ask the kernel to export control of
497 a GPIO to userspace by writing its number to this file.
498
499 Example: "echo 19 > export" will create a "gpio19" node
500 for GPIO #19, if that's not requested by kernel code.
501
502 "unexport" ... Reverses the effect of exporting to userspace.
503
504 Example: "echo 19 > unexport" will remove a "gpio19"
505 node exported using the "export" file.
506
507GPIO signals have paths like /sys/class/gpio/gpio42/ (for GPIO #42)
508and have the following read/write attributes:
509
510 /sys/class/gpio/gpioN/
511
512 "direction" ... reads as either "in" or "out". This value may
513 normally be written. Writing as "out" defaults to
514 initializing the value as low. To ensure glitch free
515 operation, values "low" and "high" may be written to
516 configure the GPIO as an output with that initial value.
517
518 Note that this attribute *will not exist* if the kernel
519 doesn't support changing the direction of a GPIO, or
520 it was exported by kernel code that didn't explicitly
521 allow userspace to reconfigure this GPIO's direction.
522
523 "value" ... reads as either 0 (low) or 1 (high). If the GPIO
524 is configured as an output, this value may be written;
525 any nonzero value is treated as high.
526
527GPIO controllers have paths like /sys/class/gpio/chipchip42/ (for the
528controller implementing GPIOs starting at #42) and have the following
529read-only attributes:
530
531 /sys/class/gpio/gpiochipN/
532
533 "base" ... same as N, the first GPIO managed by this chip
534
535 "label" ... provided for diagnostics (not always unique)
536
537 "ngpio" ... how many GPIOs this manges (N to N + ngpio - 1)
538
539Board documentation should in most cases cover what GPIOs are used for
540what purposes. However, those numbers are not always stable; GPIOs on
541a daughtercard might be different depending on the base board being used,
542or other cards in the stack. In such cases, you may need to use the
543gpiochip nodes (possibly in conjunction with schematics) to determine
544the correct GPIO number to use for a given signal.
545
546
547Exporting from Kernel code
548--------------------------
549Kernel code can explicitly manage exports of GPIOs which have already been
550requested using gpio_request():
551
552 /* export the GPIO to userspace */
553 int gpio_export(unsigned gpio, bool direction_may_change);
554
555 /* reverse gpio_export() */
556 void gpio_unexport();
557
558After a kernel driver requests a GPIO, it may only be made available in
559the sysfs interface by gpio_export(). The driver can control whether the
560signal direction may change. This helps drivers prevent userspace code
561from accidentally clobbering important system state.
562
563This explicit exporting can help with debugging (by making some kinds
564of experiments easier), or can provide an always-there interface that's
565suitable for documenting as part of a board support package.
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt b/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt
index bec9d815da33..914d07f49268 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/kvm.txt
@@ -50,9 +50,9 @@ Note: For step 2, please make sure that host page size == TARGET_PAGE_SIZE of qe
50 /usr/local/bin/qemu-system-ia64 -smp xx -m 512 -hda $your_image 50 /usr/local/bin/qemu-system-ia64 -smp xx -m 512 -hda $your_image
51 (xx is the number of virtual processors for the guest, now the maximum value is 4) 51 (xx is the number of virtual processors for the guest, now the maximum value is 4)
52 52
535. Known possibile issue on some platforms with old Firmware. 535. Known possible issue on some platforms with old Firmware.
54 54
55If meet strange host crashe issues, try to solve it through either of the following ways: 55In the event of strange host crash issues, try to solve it through either of the following ways:
56 56
57(1): Upgrade your Firmware to the latest one. 57(1): Upgrade your Firmware to the latest one.
58 58
@@ -65,8 +65,8 @@ index 0b53344..f02b0f7 100644
65 mov ar.pfs = loc1 65 mov ar.pfs = loc1
66 mov rp = loc0 66 mov rp = loc0
67 ;; 67 ;;
68- srlz.d // seralize restoration of psr.l 68- srlz.d // serialize restoration of psr.l
69+ srlz.i // seralize restoration of psr.l 69+ srlz.i // serialize restoration of psr.l
70+ ;; 70+ ;;
71 br.ret.sptk.many b0 71 br.ret.sptk.many b0
72 END(ia64_pal_call_static) 72 END(ia64_pal_call_static)
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/paravirt_ops.txt b/Documentation/ia64/paravirt_ops.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..39ded02ec33f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/paravirt_ops.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
1Paravirt_ops on IA64
2====================
3 21 May 2008, Isaku Yamahata <yamahata@valinux.co.jp>
4
5
6Introduction
7------------
8The aim of this documentation is to help with maintainability and/or to
9encourage people to use paravirt_ops/IA64.
10
11paravirt_ops (pv_ops in short) is a way for virtualization support of
12Linux kernel on x86. Several ways for virtualization support were
13proposed, paravirt_ops is the winner.
14On the other hand, now there are also several IA64 virtualization
15technologies like kvm/IA64, xen/IA64 and many other academic IA64
16hypervisors so that it is good to add generic virtualization
17infrastructure on Linux/IA64.
18
19
20What is paravirt_ops?
21---------------------
22It has been developed on x86 as virtualization support via API, not ABI.
23It allows each hypervisor to override operations which are important for
24hypervisors at API level. And it allows a single kernel binary to run on
25all supported execution environments including native machine.
26Essentially paravirt_ops is a set of function pointers which represent
27operations corresponding to low level sensitive instructions and high
28level functionalities in various area. But one significant difference
29from usual function pointer table is that it allows optimization with
30binary patch. It is because some of these operations are very
31performance sensitive and indirect call overhead is not negligible.
32With binary patch, indirect C function call can be transformed into
33direct C function call or in-place execution to eliminate the overhead.
34
35Thus, operations of paravirt_ops are classified into three categories.
36- simple indirect call
37 These operations correspond to high level functionality so that the
38 overhead of indirect call isn't very important.
39
40- indirect call which allows optimization with binary patch
41 Usually these operations correspond to low level instructions. They
42 are called frequently and performance critical. So the overhead is
43 very important.
44
45- a set of macros for hand written assembly code
46 Hand written assembly codes (.S files) also need paravirtualization
47 because they include sensitive instructions or some of code paths in
48 them are very performance critical.
49
50
51The relation to the IA64 machine vector
52---------------------------------------
53Linux/IA64 has the IA64 machine vector functionality which allows the
54kernel to switch implementations (e.g. initialization, ipi, dma api...)
55depending on executing platform.
56We can replace some implementations very easily defining a new machine
57vector. Thus another approach for virtualization support would be
58enhancing the machine vector functionality.
59But paravirt_ops approach was taken because
60- virtualization support needs wider support than machine vector does.
61 e.g. low level instruction paravirtualization. It must be
62 initialized very early before platform detection.
63
64- virtualization support needs more functionality like binary patch.
65 Probably the calling overhead might not be very large compared to the
66 emulation overhead of virtualization. However in the native case, the
67 overhead should be eliminated completely.
68 A single kernel binary should run on each environment including native,
69 and the overhead of paravirt_ops on native environment should be as
70 small as possible.
71
72- for full virtualization technology, e.g. KVM/IA64 or
73 Xen/IA64 HVM domain, the result would be
74 (the emulated platform machine vector. probably dig) + (pv_ops).
75 This means that the virtualization support layer should be under
76 the machine vector layer.
77
78Possibly it might be better to move some function pointers from
79paravirt_ops to machine vector. In fact, Xen domU case utilizes both
80pv_ops and machine vector.
81
82
83IA64 paravirt_ops
84-----------------
85In this section, the concrete paravirt_ops will be discussed.
86Because of the architecture difference between ia64 and x86, the
87resulting set of functions is very different from x86 pv_ops.
88
89- C function pointer tables
90They are not very performance critical so that simple C indirect
91function call is acceptable. The following structures are defined at
92this moment. For details see linux/include/asm-ia64/paravirt.h
93 - struct pv_info
94 This structure describes the execution environment.
95 - struct pv_init_ops
96 This structure describes the various initialization hooks.
97 - struct pv_iosapic_ops
98 This structure describes hooks to iosapic operations.
99 - struct pv_irq_ops
100 This structure describes hooks to irq related operations
101 - struct pv_time_op
102 This structure describes hooks to steal time accounting.
103
104- a set of indirect calls which need optimization
105Currently this class of functions correspond to a subset of IA64
106intrinsics. At this moment the optimization with binary patch isn't
107implemented yet.
108struct pv_cpu_op is defined. For details see
109linux/include/asm-ia64/paravirt_privop.h
110Mostly they correspond to ia64 intrinsics 1-to-1.
111Caveat: Now they are defined as C indirect function pointers, but in
112order to support binary patch optimization, they will be changed
113using GCC extended inline assembly code.
114
115- a set of macros for hand written assembly code (.S files)
116For maintenance purpose, the taken approach for .S files is single
117source code and compile multiple times with different macros definitions.
118Each pv_ops instance must define those macros to compile.
119The important thing here is that sensitive, but non-privileged
120instructions must be paravirtualized and that some privileged
121instructions also need paravirtualization for reasonable performance.
122Developers who modify .S files must be aware of that. At this moment
123an easy checker is implemented to detect paravirtualization breakage.
124But it doesn't cover all the cases.
125
126Sometimes this set of macros is called pv_cpu_asm_op. But there is no
127corresponding structure in the source code.
128Those macros mostly 1:1 correspond to a subset of privileged
129instructions. See linux/include/asm-ia64/native/inst.h.
130And some functions written in assembly also need to be overrided so
131that each pv_ops instance have to define some macros. Again see
132linux/include/asm-ia64/native/inst.h.
133
134
135Those structures must be initialized very early before start_kernel.
136Probably initialized in head.S using multi entry point or some other trick.
137For native case implementation see linux/arch/ia64/kernel/paravirt.c.
diff --git a/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt b/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt
index afe0d6543e09..202e9dbacec3 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/cs461x.txt
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ The driver works with ALSA drivers simultaneously. For example, the xracer
31uses joystick as input device and PCM device as sound output in one time. 31uses joystick as input device and PCM device as sound output in one time.
32There are no sound or input collisions detected. The source code have 32There are no sound or input collisions detected. The source code have
33comments about them; but I've found the joystick can be initialized 33comments about them; but I've found the joystick can be initialized
34separately of ALSA modules. So, you canm use only one joystick driver 34separately of ALSA modules. So, you can use only one joystick driver
35without ALSA drivers. The ALSA drivers are not needed to compile or 35without ALSA drivers. The ALSA drivers are not needed to compile or
36run this driver. 36run this driver.
37 37
diff --git a/Documentation/input/gameport-programming.txt b/Documentation/input/gameport-programming.txt
index 14e0a8b70225..03a74fc3b496 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/gameport-programming.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/gameport-programming.txt
@@ -1,5 +1,3 @@
1$Id: gameport-programming.txt,v 1.3 2001/04/24 13:51:37 vojtech Exp $
2
3Programming gameport drivers 1Programming gameport drivers
4~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 2~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
5 3
diff --git a/Documentation/input/input.txt b/Documentation/input/input.txt
index ff8cea0225f9..686ee9932dff 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/input.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/input.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
1 Linux Input drivers v1.0 1 Linux Input drivers v1.0
2 (c) 1999-2001 Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@ucw.cz> 2 (c) 1999-2001 Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@ucw.cz>
3 Sponsored by SuSE 3 Sponsored by SuSE
4 $Id: input.txt,v 1.8 2002/05/29 03:15:01 bradleym Exp $
5---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4----------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 5
70. Disclaimer 60. Disclaimer
diff --git a/Documentation/input/joystick-api.txt b/Documentation/input/joystick-api.txt
index acbd32b88454..c507330740cd 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/joystick-api.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/joystick-api.txt
@@ -5,8 +5,6 @@
5 5
6 7 Aug 1998 6 7 Aug 1998
7 7
8 $Id: joystick-api.txt,v 1.2 2001/05/08 21:21:23 vojtech Exp $
9
101. Initialization 81. Initialization
11~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ 9~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
12 10
diff --git a/Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt b/Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt
index ede5f33daad3..1c856f32ff2c 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/joystick-parport.txt
@@ -2,7 +2,6 @@
2 (c) 1998-2000 Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@ucw.cz> 2 (c) 1998-2000 Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@ucw.cz>
3 (c) 1998 Andree Borrmann <a.borrmann@tu-bs.de> 3 (c) 1998 Andree Borrmann <a.borrmann@tu-bs.de>
4 Sponsored by SuSE 4 Sponsored by SuSE
5 $Id: joystick-parport.txt,v 1.6 2001/09/25 09:31:32 vojtech Exp $
6---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5----------------------------------------------------------------------------
7 6
80. Disclaimer 70. Disclaimer
diff --git a/Documentation/input/joystick.txt b/Documentation/input/joystick.txt
index 389de9bd9878..154d767b2acb 100644
--- a/Documentation/input/joystick.txt
+++ b/Documentation/input/joystick.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
1 Linux Joystick driver v2.0.0 1 Linux Joystick driver v2.0.0
2 (c) 1996-2000 Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@ucw.cz> 2 (c) 1996-2000 Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@ucw.cz>
3 Sponsored by SuSE 3 Sponsored by SuSE
4 $Id: joystick.txt,v 1.12 2002/03/03 12:13:07 jdeneux Exp $
5---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4----------------------------------------------------------------------------
6 5
70. Disclaimer 60. Disclaimer
diff --git a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt
index bfdf7f3ee4f0..e35efb0cec2e 100644
--- a/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ioctl/ioctl-decoding.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
1To decode a hex IOCTL code: 1To decode a hex IOCTL code:
2 2
3Most architecures use this generic format, but check 3Most architectures use this generic format, but check
4include/ARCH/ioctl.h for specifics, e.g. powerpc 4include/ARCH/ioctl.h for specifics, e.g. powerpc
5uses 3 bits to encode read/write and 13 bits for size. 5uses 3 bits to encode read/write and 13 bits for size.
6 6
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ uses 3 bits to encode read/write and 13 bits for size.
18 7-0 function # 18 7-0 function #
19 19
20 20
21 So for example 0x82187201 is a read with arg length of 0x218, 21So for example 0x82187201 is a read with arg length of 0x218,
22character 'r' function 1. Grepping the source reveals this is: 22character 'r' function 1. Grepping the source reveals this is:
23 23
24#define VFAT_IOCTL_READDIR_BOTH _IOR('r', 1, struct dirent [2]) 24#define VFAT_IOCTL_READDIR_BOTH _IOR('r', 1, struct dirent [2])
diff --git a/Documentation/iostats.txt b/Documentation/iostats.txt
index 5925c3cd030d..59a69ec67c40 100644
--- a/Documentation/iostats.txt
+++ b/Documentation/iostats.txt
@@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ disk and partition statistics are consistent again. Since we still don't
143keep record of the partition-relative address, an operation is attributed to 143keep record of the partition-relative address, an operation is attributed to
144the partition which contains the first sector of the request after the 144the partition which contains the first sector of the request after the
145eventual merges. As requests can be merged across partition, this could lead 145eventual merges. As requests can be merged across partition, this could lead
146to some (probably insignificant) innacuracy. 146to some (probably insignificant) inaccuracy.
147 147
148Additional notes 148Additional notes
149---------------- 149----------------
diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN b/Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..cd8bf920e77b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/isdn/README.mISDN
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
1mISDN is a new modular ISDN driver, in the long term it should replace
2the old I4L driver architecture for passiv ISDN cards.
3It was designed to allow a broad range of applications and interfaces
4but only have the basic function in kernel, the interface to the user
5space is based on sockets with a own address family AF_ISDN.
6
diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
index 09ad7450647b..e7bea3e85304 100644
--- a/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -87,7 +87,8 @@ parameter is applicable:
87 SH SuperH architecture is enabled. 87 SH SuperH architecture is enabled.
88 SMP The kernel is an SMP kernel. 88 SMP The kernel is an SMP kernel.
89 SPARC Sparc architecture is enabled. 89 SPARC Sparc architecture is enabled.
90 SWSUSP Software suspend is enabled. 90 SWSUSP Software suspend (hibernation) is enabled.
91 SUSPEND System suspend states are enabled.
91 TS Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled. 92 TS Appropriate touchscreen support is enabled.
92 USB USB support is enabled. 93 USB USB support is enabled.
93 USBHID USB Human Interface Device support is enabled. 94 USBHID USB Human Interface Device support is enabled.
@@ -147,10 +148,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
147 default: 0 148 default: 0
148 149
149 acpi_sleep= [HW,ACPI] Sleep options 150 acpi_sleep= [HW,ACPI] Sleep options
150 Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, old_ordering } 151 Format: { s3_bios, s3_mode, s3_beep, s4_nohwsig, old_ordering }
151 See Documentation/power/video.txt for s3_bios and s3_mode. 152 See Documentation/power/video.txt for s3_bios and s3_mode.
152 s3_beep is for debugging; it makes the PC's speaker beep 153 s3_beep is for debugging; it makes the PC's speaker beep
153 as soon as the kernel's real-mode entry point is called. 154 as soon as the kernel's real-mode entry point is called.
155 s4_nohwsig prevents ACPI hardware signature from being
156 used during resume from hibernation.
154 old_ordering causes the ACPI 1.0 ordering of the _PTS 157 old_ordering causes the ACPI 1.0 ordering of the _PTS
155 control method, wrt putting devices into low power 158 control method, wrt putting devices into low power
156 states, to be enforced (the ACPI 2.0 ordering of _PTS is 159 states, to be enforced (the ACPI 2.0 ordering of _PTS is
@@ -774,8 +777,22 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
774 hisax= [HW,ISDN] 777 hisax= [HW,ISDN]
775 See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax. 778 See Documentation/isdn/README.HiSax.
776 779
777 hugepages= [HW,X86-32,IA-64] Maximal number of HugeTLB pages. 780 hugepages= [HW,X86-32,IA-64] HugeTLB pages to allocate at boot.
778 hugepagesz= [HW,IA-64,PPC] The size of the HugeTLB pages. 781 hugepagesz= [HW,IA-64,PPC,X86-64] The size of the HugeTLB pages.
782 On x86-64 and powerpc, this option can be specified
783 multiple times interleaved with hugepages= to reserve
784 huge pages of different sizes. Valid pages sizes on
785 x86-64 are 2M (when the CPU supports "pse") and 1G
786 (when the CPU supports the "pdpe1gb" cpuinfo flag)
787 Note that 1GB pages can only be allocated at boot time
788 using hugepages= and not freed afterwards.
789 default_hugepagesz=
790 [same as hugepagesz=] The size of the default
791 HugeTLB page size. This is the size represented by
792 the legacy /proc/ hugepages APIs, used for SHM, and
793 default size when mounting hugetlbfs filesystems.
794 Defaults to the default architecture's huge page size
795 if not specified.
779 796
780 i8042.direct [HW] Put keyboard port into non-translated mode 797 i8042.direct [HW] Put keyboard port into non-translated mode
781 i8042.dumbkbd [HW] Pretend that controller can only read data from 798 i8042.dumbkbd [HW] Pretend that controller can only read data from
@@ -1206,7 +1223,7 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
1206 or 1223 or
1207 memmap=0x10000$0x18690000 1224 memmap=0x10000$0x18690000
1208 1225
1209 memtest= [KNL,X86_64] Enable memtest 1226 memtest= [KNL,X86] Enable memtest
1210 Format: <integer> 1227 Format: <integer>
1211 range: 0,4 : pattern number 1228 range: 0,4 : pattern number
1212 default : 0 <disable> 1229 default : 0 <disable>
@@ -1225,6 +1242,14 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
1225 1242
1226 mga= [HW,DRM] 1243 mga= [HW,DRM]
1227 1244
1245 mminit_loglevel=
1246 [KNL] When CONFIG_DEBUG_MEMORY_INIT is set, this
1247 parameter allows control of the logging verbosity for
1248 the additional memory initialisation checks. A value
1249 of 0 disables mminit logging and a level of 4 will
1250 log everything. Information is printed at KERN_DEBUG
1251 so loglevel=8 may also need to be specified.
1252
1228 mousedev.tap_time= 1253 mousedev.tap_time=
1229 [MOUSE] Maximum time between finger touching and 1254 [MOUSE] Maximum time between finger touching and
1230 leaving touchpad surface for touch to be considered 1255 leaving touchpad surface for touch to be considered
@@ -1279,6 +1304,13 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
1279 This usage is only documented in each driver source 1304 This usage is only documented in each driver source
1280 file if at all. 1305 file if at all.
1281 1306
1307 nf_conntrack.acct=
1308 [NETFILTER] Enable connection tracking flow accounting
1309 0 to disable accounting
1310 1 to enable accounting
1311 Default value depends on CONFIG_NF_CT_ACCT that is
1312 going to be removed in 2.6.29.
1313
1282 nfsaddrs= [NFS] 1314 nfsaddrs= [NFS]
1283 See Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt. 1315 See Documentation/filesystems/nfsroot.txt.
1284 1316
@@ -2027,6 +2059,9 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
2027 2059
2028 snd-ymfpci= [HW,ALSA] 2060 snd-ymfpci= [HW,ALSA]
2029 2061
2062 softlockup_panic=
2063 [KNL] Should the soft-lockup detector generate panics.
2064
2030 sonypi.*= [HW] Sony Programmable I/O Control Device driver 2065 sonypi.*= [HW] Sony Programmable I/O Control Device driver
2031 See Documentation/sonypi.txt 2066 See Documentation/sonypi.txt
2032 2067
@@ -2091,6 +2126,12 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
2091 2126
2092 tdfx= [HW,DRM] 2127 tdfx= [HW,DRM]
2093 2128
2129 test_suspend= [SUSPEND]
2130 Specify "mem" (for Suspend-to-RAM) or "standby" (for
2131 standby suspend) as the system sleep state to briefly
2132 enter during system startup. The system is woken from
2133 this state using a wakeup-capable RTC alarm.
2134
2094 thash_entries= [KNL,NET] 2135 thash_entries= [KNL,NET]
2095 Set number of hash buckets for TCP connection 2136 Set number of hash buckets for TCP connection
2096 2137
@@ -2118,13 +2159,6 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
2118 <deci-seconds>: poll all this frequency 2159 <deci-seconds>: poll all this frequency
2119 0: no polling (default) 2160 0: no polling (default)
2120 2161
2121 tipar.timeout= [HW,PPT]
2122 Set communications timeout in tenths of a second
2123 (default 15).
2124
2125 tipar.delay= [HW,PPT]
2126 Set inter-bit delay in microseconds (default 10).
2127
2128 tmscsim= [HW,SCSI] 2162 tmscsim= [HW,SCSI]
2129 See comment before function dc390_setup() in 2163 See comment before function dc390_setup() in
2130 drivers/scsi/tmscsim.c. 2164 drivers/scsi/tmscsim.c.
@@ -2158,6 +2192,10 @@ and is between 256 and 4096 characters. It is defined in the file
2158 Note that genuine overcurrent events won't be 2192 Note that genuine overcurrent events won't be
2159 reported either. 2193 reported either.
2160 2194
2195 unknown_nmi_panic
2196 [X86-32,X86-64]
2197 Set unknown_nmi_panic=1 early on boot.
2198
2161 usbcore.autosuspend= 2199 usbcore.autosuspend=
2162 [USB] The autosuspend time delay (in seconds) used 2200 [USB] The autosuspend time delay (in seconds) used
2163 for newly-detected USB devices (default 2). This 2201 for newly-detected USB devices (default 2). This
diff --git a/Documentation/keys.txt b/Documentation/keys.txt
index d5c7a57d1700..b56aacc1fff8 100644
--- a/Documentation/keys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/keys.txt
@@ -864,7 +864,7 @@ payload contents" for more information.
864 request_key_with_auxdata() respectively. 864 request_key_with_auxdata() respectively.
865 865
866 These two functions return with the key potentially still under 866 These two functions return with the key potentially still under
867 construction. To wait for contruction completion, the following should be 867 construction. To wait for construction completion, the following should be
868 called: 868 called:
869 869
870 int wait_for_key_construction(struct key *key, bool intr); 870 int wait_for_key_construction(struct key *key, bool intr);
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
index 64b3f146e4b0..02dc748b76c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
1 ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver 1 ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver
2 2
3 Version 0.20 3 Version 0.21
4 April 09th, 2008 4 May 29th, 2008
5 5
6 Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net> 6 Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net>
7 Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br> 7 Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
@@ -621,7 +621,8 @@ Bluetooth
621--------- 621---------
622 622
623procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth 623procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
624sysfs device attribute: bluetooth_enable 624sysfs device attribute: bluetooth_enable (deprecated)
625sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_bluetooth_sw"
625 626
626This feature shows the presence and current state of a ThinkPad 627This feature shows the presence and current state of a ThinkPad
627Bluetooth device in the internal ThinkPad CDC slot. 628Bluetooth device in the internal ThinkPad CDC slot.
@@ -643,8 +644,12 @@ Sysfs notes:
643 0: disables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is disabled 644 0: disables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is disabled
644 1: enables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is enabled. 645 1: enables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is enabled.
645 646
646 Note: this interface will be probably be superseded by the 647 Note: this interface has been superseded by the generic rfkill
647 generic rfkill class, so it is NOT to be considered stable yet. 648 class. It has been deprecated, and it will be removed in year
649 2010.
650
651 rfkill controller switch "tpacpi_bluetooth_sw": refer to
652 Documentation/rfkill.txt for details.
648 653
649Video output control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/video 654Video output control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/video
650-------------------------------------------- 655--------------------------------------------
@@ -1374,7 +1379,8 @@ EXPERIMENTAL: WAN
1374----------------- 1379-----------------
1375 1380
1376procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/wan 1381procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
1377sysfs device attribute: wwan_enable 1382sysfs device attribute: wwan_enable (deprecated)
1383sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw"
1378 1384
1379This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation 1385This feature is marked EXPERIMENTAL because the implementation
1380directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE 1386directly accesses hardware registers and may not work as expected. USE
@@ -1404,8 +1410,12 @@ Sysfs notes:
1404 0: disables WWAN card / WWAN card is disabled 1410 0: disables WWAN card / WWAN card is disabled
1405 1: enables WWAN card / WWAN card is enabled. 1411 1: enables WWAN card / WWAN card is enabled.
1406 1412
1407 Note: this interface will be probably be superseded by the 1413 Note: this interface has been superseded by the generic rfkill
1408 generic rfkill class, so it is NOT to be considered stable yet. 1414 class. It has been deprecated, and it will be removed in year
1415 2010.
1416
1417 rfkill controller switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw": refer to
1418 Documentation/rfkill.txt for details.
1409 1419
1410Multiple Commands, Module Parameters 1420Multiple Commands, Module Parameters
1411------------------------------------ 1421------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/leds-class.txt b/Documentation/leds-class.txt
index 18860ad9935a..6399557cdab3 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds-class.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds-class.txt
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Hardware accelerated blink of LEDs
59 59
60Some LEDs can be programmed to blink without any CPU interaction. To 60Some LEDs can be programmed to blink without any CPU interaction. To
61support this feature, a LED driver can optionally implement the 61support this feature, a LED driver can optionally implement the
62blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). If implemeted, triggers can 62blink_set() function (see <linux/leds.h>). If implemented, triggers can
63attempt to use it before falling back to software timers. The blink_set() 63attempt to use it before falling back to software timers. The blink_set()
64function should return 0 if the blink setting is supported, or -EINVAL 64function should return 0 if the blink setting is supported, or -EINVAL
65otherwise, which means that LED blinking will be handled by software. 65otherwise, which means that LED blinking will be handled by software.
diff --git a/Documentation/local_ops.txt b/Documentation/local_ops.txt
index 4269a1105b37..f4f8b1c6c8ba 100644
--- a/Documentation/local_ops.txt
+++ b/Documentation/local_ops.txt
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ It can be done by slightly modifying the standard atomic operations : only
36their UP variant must be kept. It typically means removing LOCK prefix (on 36their UP variant must be kept. It typically means removing LOCK prefix (on
37i386 and x86_64) and any SMP sychronization barrier. If the architecture does 37i386 and x86_64) and any SMP sychronization barrier. If the architecture does
38not have a different behavior between SMP and UP, including asm-generic/local.h 38not have a different behavior between SMP and UP, including asm-generic/local.h
39in your archtecture's local.h is sufficient. 39in your architecture's local.h is sufficient.
40 40
41The local_t type is defined as an opaque signed long by embedding an 41The local_t type is defined as an opaque signed long by embedding an
42atomic_long_t inside a structure. This is made so a cast from this type to a 42atomic_long_t inside a structure. This is made so a cast from this type to a
diff --git a/Documentation/md.txt b/Documentation/md.txt
index a8b430627473..1da9d1b1793f 100644
--- a/Documentation/md.txt
+++ b/Documentation/md.txt
@@ -236,6 +236,11 @@ All md devices contain:
236 writing the word for the desired state, however some states 236 writing the word for the desired state, however some states
237 cannot be explicitly set, and some transitions are not allowed. 237 cannot be explicitly set, and some transitions are not allowed.
238 238
239 Select/poll works on this file. All changes except between
240 active_idle and active (which can be frequent and are not
241 very interesting) are notified. active->active_idle is
242 reported if the metadata is externally managed.
243
239 clear 244 clear
240 No devices, no size, no level 245 No devices, no size, no level
241 Writing is equivalent to STOP_ARRAY ioctl 246 Writing is equivalent to STOP_ARRAY ioctl
@@ -292,6 +297,10 @@ Each directory contains:
292 writemostly - device will only be subject to read 297 writemostly - device will only be subject to read
293 requests if there are no other options. 298 requests if there are no other options.
294 This applies only to raid1 arrays. 299 This applies only to raid1 arrays.
300 blocked - device has failed, metadata is "external",
301 and the failure hasn't been acknowledged yet.
302 Writes that would write to this device if
303 it were not faulty are blocked.
295 spare - device is working, but not a full member. 304 spare - device is working, but not a full member.
296 This includes spares that are in the process 305 This includes spares that are in the process
297 of being recovered to 306 of being recovered to
@@ -301,6 +310,12 @@ Each directory contains:
301 Writing "remove" removes the device from the array. 310 Writing "remove" removes the device from the array.
302 Writing "writemostly" sets the writemostly flag. 311 Writing "writemostly" sets the writemostly flag.
303 Writing "-writemostly" clears the writemostly flag. 312 Writing "-writemostly" clears the writemostly flag.
313 Writing "blocked" sets the "blocked" flag.
314 Writing "-blocked" clear the "blocked" flag and allows writes
315 to complete.
316
317 This file responds to select/poll. Any change to 'faulty'
318 or 'blocked' causes an event.
304 319
305 errors 320 errors
306 An approximate count of read errors that have been detected on 321 An approximate count of read errors that have been detected on
@@ -332,7 +347,7 @@ Each directory contains:
332 for storage of data. This will normally be the same as the 347 for storage of data. This will normally be the same as the
333 component_size. This can be written while assembling an 348 component_size. This can be written while assembling an
334 array. If a value less than the current component_size is 349 array. If a value less than the current component_size is
335 written, component_size will be reduced to this value. 350 written, it will be rejected.
336 351
337 352
338An active md device will also contain and entry for each active device 353An active md device will also contain and entry for each active device
@@ -381,6 +396,19 @@ also have
381 'check' and 'repair' will start the appropriate process 396 'check' and 'repair' will start the appropriate process
382 providing the current state is 'idle'. 397 providing the current state is 'idle'.
383 398
399 This file responds to select/poll. Any important change in the value
400 triggers a poll event. Sometimes the value will briefly be
401 "recover" if a recovery seems to be needed, but cannot be
402 achieved. In that case, the transition to "recover" isn't
403 notified, but the transition away is.
404
405 degraded
406 This contains a count of the number of devices by which the
407 arrays is degraded. So an optimal array with show '0'. A
408 single failed/missing drive will show '1', etc.
409 This file responds to select/poll, any increase or decrease
410 in the count of missing devices will trigger an event.
411
384 mismatch_count 412 mismatch_count
385 When performing 'check' and 'repair', and possibly when 413 When performing 'check' and 'repair', and possibly when
386 performing 'resync', md will count the number of errors that are 414 performing 'resync', md will count the number of errors that are
diff --git a/Documentation/moxa-smartio b/Documentation/moxa-smartio
index fe24ecc6372e..5337e80a5b96 100644
--- a/Documentation/moxa-smartio
+++ b/Documentation/moxa-smartio
@@ -1,14 +1,22 @@
1============================================================================= 1=============================================================================
2 2 MOXA Smartio/Industio Family Device Driver Installation Guide
3 MOXA Smartio Family Device Driver Ver 1.1 Installation Guide 3 for Linux Kernel 2.4.x, 2.6.x
4 for Linux Kernel 2.2.x and 2.0.3x 4 Copyright (C) 2008, Moxa Inc.
5 Copyright (C) 1999, Moxa Technologies Co, Ltd.
6============================================================================= 5=============================================================================
6Date: 01/21/2008
7
7Content 8Content
8 9
91. Introduction 101. Introduction
102. System Requirement 112. System Requirement
113. Installation 123. Installation
13 3.1 Hardware installation
14 3.2 Driver files
15 3.3 Device naming convention
16 3.4 Module driver configuration
17 3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x.
18 3.6 Custom configuration
19 3.7 Verify driver installation
124. Utilities 204. Utilities
135. Setserial 215. Setserial
146. Troubleshooting 226. Troubleshooting
@@ -16,27 +24,48 @@ Content
16----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
171. Introduction 251. Introduction
18 26
19 The Smartio family Linux driver, Ver. 1.1, supports following multiport 27 The Smartio/Industio/UPCI family Linux driver supports following multiport
20 boards. 28 boards.
21 29
22 -C104P/H/HS, C104H/PCI, C104HS/PCI, CI-104J 4 port multiport board. 30 - 2 ports multiport board
23 -C168P/H/HS, C168H/PCI 8 port multiport board. 31 CP-102U, CP-102UL, CP-102UF
24 32 CP-132U-I, CP-132UL,
25 This driver has been modified a little and cleaned up from the Moxa 33 CP-132, CP-132I, CP132S, CP-132IS,
26 contributed driver code and merged into Linux 2.2.14pre. In particular 34 CI-132, CI-132I, CI-132IS,
27 official major/minor numbers have been assigned which are different to 35 (C102H, C102HI, C102HIS, C102P, CP-102, CP-102S)
28 those the original Moxa supplied driver used. 36
37 - 4 ports multiport board
38 CP-104EL,
39 CP-104UL, CP-104JU,
40 CP-134U, CP-134U-I,
41 C104H/PCI, C104HS/PCI,
42 CP-114, CP-114I, CP-114S, CP-114IS, CP-114UL,
43 C104H, C104HS,
44 CI-104J, CI-104JS,
45 CI-134, CI-134I, CI-134IS,
46 (C114HI, CT-114I, C104P)
47 POS-104UL,
48 CB-114,
49 CB-134I
50
51 - 8 ports multiport board
52 CP-118EL, CP-168EL,
53 CP-118U, CP-168U,
54 C168H/PCI,
55 C168H, C168HS,
56 (C168P),
57 CB-108
29 58
30 This driver and installation procedure have been developed upon Linux Kernel 59 This driver and installation procedure have been developed upon Linux Kernel
31 2.2.5 and backward compatible to 2.0.3x. This driver supports Intel x86 and 60 2.4.x and 2.6.x. This driver supports Intel x86 hardware platform. In order
32 Alpha hardware platform. In order to maintain compatibility, this version 61 to maintain compatibility, this version has also been properly tested with
33 has also been properly tested with RedHat, OpenLinux, TurboLinux and 62 RedHat, Mandrake, Fedora and S.u.S.E Linux. However, if compatibility problem
34 S.u.S.E Linux. However, if compatibility problem occurs, please contact 63 occurs, please contact Moxa at support@moxa.com.tw.
35 Moxa at support@moxa.com.tw.
36 64
37 In addition to device driver, useful utilities are also provided in this 65 In addition to device driver, useful utilities are also provided in this
38 version. They are 66 version. They are
39 - msdiag Diagnostic program for detecting installed Moxa Smartio boards. 67 - msdiag Diagnostic program for displaying installed Moxa
68 Smartio/Industio boards.
40 - msmon Monitor program to observe data count and line status signals. 69 - msmon Monitor program to observe data count and line status signals.
41 - msterm A simple terminal program which is useful in testing serial 70 - msterm A simple terminal program which is useful in testing serial
42 ports. 71 ports.
@@ -47,8 +76,7 @@ Content
47 GNU General Public License in this version. Please refer to GNU General 76 GNU General Public License in this version. Please refer to GNU General
48 Public License announcement in each source code file for more detail. 77 Public License announcement in each source code file for more detail.
49 78
50 In Moxa's ftp sites, you may always find latest driver at 79 In Moxa's Web sites, you may always find latest driver at http://web.moxa.com.
51 ftp://ftp.moxa.com or ftp://ftp.moxa.com.tw.
52 80
53 This version of driver can be installed as Loadable Module (Module driver) 81 This version of driver can be installed as Loadable Module (Module driver)
54 or built-in into kernel (Static driver). You may refer to following 82 or built-in into kernel (Static driver). You may refer to following
@@ -61,8 +89,8 @@ Content
61 89
62----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 90-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
632. System Requirement 912. System Requirement
64 - Hardware platform: Intel x86 or Alpha machine 92 - Hardware platform: Intel x86 machine
65 - Kernel version: 2.0.3x or 2.2.x 93 - Kernel version: 2.4.x or 2.6.x
66 - gcc version 2.72 or later 94 - gcc version 2.72 or later
67 - Maximum 4 boards can be installed in combination 95 - Maximum 4 boards can be installed in combination
68 96
@@ -70,9 +98,18 @@ Content
703. Installation 983. Installation
71 99
72 3.1 Hardware installation 100 3.1 Hardware installation
101 3.2 Driver files
102 3.3 Device naming convention
103 3.4 Module driver configuration
104 3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x, 2.6.x.
105 3.6 Custom configuration
106 3.7 Verify driver installation
107
108
109 3.1 Hardware installation
73 110
74 There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio family multiport 111 There are two types of buses, ISA and PCI, for Smartio/Industio
75 board. 112 family multiport board.
76 113
77 ISA board 114 ISA board
78 --------- 115 ---------
@@ -81,47 +118,57 @@ Content
81 installation procedure in User's Manual before proceed any further. 118 installation procedure in User's Manual before proceed any further.
82 Please make sure the JP1 is open after the ISA board is set properly. 119 Please make sure the JP1 is open after the ISA board is set properly.
83 120
84 PCI board 121 PCI/UPCI board
85 --------- 122 --------------
86 You may need to adjust IRQ usage in BIOS to avoid from IRQ conflict 123 You may need to adjust IRQ usage in BIOS to avoid from IRQ conflict
87 with other ISA devices. Please refer to hardware installation 124 with other ISA devices. Please refer to hardware installation
88 procedure in User's Manual in advance. 125 procedure in User's Manual in advance.
89 126
90 IRQ Sharing 127 PCI IRQ Sharing
91 ----------- 128 -----------
92 Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Up to 129 Each port within the same multiport board shares the same IRQ. Up to
93 4 Moxa Smartio Family multiport boards can be installed together on 130 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio PCI Family multiport boards can be installed
94 one system and they can share the same IRQ. 131 together on one system and they can share the same IRQ.
132
95 133
96 3.2 Driver files and device naming convention 134 3.2 Driver files
97 135
98 The driver file may be obtained from ftp, CD-ROM or floppy disk. The 136 The driver file may be obtained from ftp, CD-ROM or floppy disk. The
99 first step, anyway, is to copy driver file "mxser.tgz" into specified 137 first step, anyway, is to copy driver file "mxser.tgz" into specified
100 directory. e.g. /moxa. The execute commands as below. 138 directory. e.g. /moxa. The execute commands as below.
101 139
140 # cd /
141 # mkdir moxa
102 # cd /moxa 142 # cd /moxa
103 # tar xvf /dev/fd0 143 # tar xvf /dev/fd0
144
104 or 145 or
146
147 # cd /
148 # mkdir moxa
105 # cd /moxa 149 # cd /moxa
106 # cp /mnt/cdrom/<driver directory>/mxser.tgz . 150 # cp /mnt/cdrom/<driver directory>/mxser.tgz .
107 # tar xvfz mxser.tgz 151 # tar xvfz mxser.tgz
108 152
153
154 3.3 Device naming convention
155
109 You may find all the driver and utilities files in /moxa/mxser. 156 You may find all the driver and utilities files in /moxa/mxser.
110 Following installation procedure depends on the model you'd like to 157 Following installation procedure depends on the model you'd like to
111 run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.3. 158 run the driver. If you prefer module driver, please refer to 3.4.
112 If static driver is required, please refer to 3.4. 159 If static driver is required, please refer to 3.5.
113 160
114 Dialin and callout port 161 Dialin and callout port
115 ----------------------- 162 -----------------------
116 This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There're 163 This driver remains traditional serial device properties. There are
117 two special file name for each serial port. One is dial-in port 164 two special file name for each serial port. One is dial-in port
118 which is named "ttyMxx". For callout port, the naming convention 165 which is named "ttyMxx". For callout port, the naming convention
119 is "cumxx". 166 is "cumxx".
120 167
121 Device naming when more than 2 boards installed 168 Device naming when more than 2 boards installed
122 ----------------------------------------------- 169 -----------------------------------------------
123 Naming convention for each Smartio multiport board is pre-defined 170 Naming convention for each Smartio/Industio multiport board is
124 as below. 171 pre-defined as below.
125 172
126 Board Num. Dial-in Port Callout port 173 Board Num. Dial-in Port Callout port
127 1st board ttyM0 - ttyM7 cum0 - cum7 174 1st board ttyM0 - ttyM7 cum0 - cum7
@@ -129,6 +176,12 @@ Content
129 3rd board ttyM16 - ttyM23 cum16 - cum23 176 3rd board ttyM16 - ttyM23 cum16 - cum23
130 4th board ttyM24 - ttym31 cum24 - cum31 177 4th board ttyM24 - ttym31 cum24 - cum31
131 178
179
180 !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
181 Under Kernel 2.6 the cum Device is Obsolete. So use ttyM*
182 device instead.
183 !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
184
132 Board sequence 185 Board sequence
133 -------------- 186 --------------
134 This driver will activate ISA boards according to the parameter set 187 This driver will activate ISA boards according to the parameter set
@@ -138,69 +191,131 @@ Content
138 For PCI boards, their sequence will be after ISA boards and C168H/PCI 191 For PCI boards, their sequence will be after ISA boards and C168H/PCI
139 has higher priority than C104H/PCI boards. 192 has higher priority than C104H/PCI boards.
140 193
141 3.3 Module driver configuration 194 3.4 Module driver configuration
142 Module driver is easiest way to install. If you prefer static driver 195 Module driver is easiest way to install. If you prefer static driver
143 installation, please skip this paragraph. 196 installation, please skip this paragraph.
144 1. Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run
145 197
146 # make install 198
199 ------------- Prepare to use the MOXA driver--------------------
200 3.4.1 Create tty device with correct major number
201 Before using MOXA driver, your system must have the tty devices
202 which are created with driver's major number. We offer one shell
203 script "msmknod" to simplify the procedure.
204 This step is only needed to be executed once. But you still
205 need to do this procedure when:
206 a. You change the driver's major number. Please refer the "3.7"
207 section.
208 b. Your total installed MOXA boards number is changed. Maybe you
209 add/delete one MOXA board.
210 c. You want to change the tty name. This needs to modify the
211 shell script "msmknod"
212
213 The procedure is:
214 # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
215 # ./msmknod
216
217 This shell script will require the major number for dial-in
218 device and callout device to create tty device. You also need
219 to specify the total installed MOXA board number. Default major
220 numbers for dial-in device and callout device are 30, 35. If
221 you need to change to other number, please refer section "3.7"
222 for more detailed procedure.
223 Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same device
224 naming.
225
226 3.4.2 Build the MOXA driver and utilities
227 Before using the MOXA driver and utilities, you need compile the
228 all the source code. This step is only need to be executed once.
229 But you still re-compile the source code if you modify the source
230 code. For example, if you change the driver's major number (see
231 "3.7" section), then you need to do this step again.
232
233 Find "Makefile" in /moxa/mxser, then run
234
235 # make clean; make install
236
237 !!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
238 For Red Hat 9, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS3/ES3/WS3 & Fedora Core1:
239 # make clean; make installsp1
240
241 For Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS4/ES4/WS4:
242 # make clean; make installsp2
243 !!!!!!!!!! NOTE !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!
147 244
148 The driver files "mxser.o" and utilities will be properly compiled 245 The driver files "mxser.o" and utilities will be properly compiled
149 and copied to system directories respectively.Then run 246 and copied to system directories respectively.
150 247
151 # insmod mxser 248 ------------- Load MOXA driver--------------------
249 3.4.3 Load the MOXA driver
152 250
153 to activate the modular driver. You may run "lsmod" to check 251 # modprobe mxser <argument>
154 if "mxser.o" is activated.
155 252
156 2. Create special files by executing "msmknod". 253 will activate the module driver. You may run "lsmod" to check
157 # cd /moxa/mxser/driver 254 if "mxser" is activated. If the MOXA board is ISA board, the
158 # ./msmknod 255 <argument> is needed. Please refer to section "3.4.5" for more
256 information.
257
258
259 ------------- Load MOXA driver on boot --------------------
260 3.4.4 For the above description, you may manually execute
261 "modprobe mxser" to activate this driver and run
262 "rmmod mxser" to remove it.
263 However, it's better to have a boot time configuration to
264 eliminate manual operation. Boot time configuration can be
265 achieved by rc file. We offer one "rc.mxser" file to simplify
266 the procedure under "moxa/mxser/driver".
159 267
160 Default major numbers for dial-in device and callout device are 268 But if you use ISA board, please modify the "modprobe ..." command
161 174, 175. Msmknod will delete any special files occupying the same 269 to add the argument (see "3.4.5" section). After modifying the
162 device naming. 270 rc.mxser, please try to execute "/moxa/mxser/driver/rc.mxser"
271 manually to make sure the modification is ok. If any error
272 encountered, please try to modify again. If the modification is
273 completed, follow the below step.
163 274
164 3. Up to now, you may manually execute "insmod mxser" to activate 275 Run following command for setting rc files.
165 this driver and run "rmmod mxser" to remove it. However, it's
166 better to have a boot time configuration to eliminate manual
167 operation.
168 Boot time configuration can be achieved by rc file. Run following
169 command for setting rc files.
170 276
171 # cd /moxa/mxser/driver 277 # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
172 # cp ./rc.mxser /etc/rc.d 278 # cp ./rc.mxser /etc/rc.d
173 # cd /etc/rc.d 279 # cd /etc/rc.d
174 280
175 You may have to modify part of the content in rc.mxser to specify 281 Check "rc.serial" is existed or not. If "rc.serial" doesn't exist,
176 parameters for ISA board. Please refer to rc.mxser for more detail. 282 create it by vi, run "chmod 755 rc.serial" to change the permission.
177 Find "rc.serial". If "rc.serial" doesn't exist, create it by vi. 283 Add "/etc/rc.d/rc.mxser" in last line,
178 Add "rc.mxser" in last line. Next, open rc.local by vi
179 and append following content.
180 284
181 if [ -f /etc/rc.d/rc.serial ]; then 285 Reboot and check if moxa.o activated by "lsmod" command.
182 sh /etc/rc.d/rc.serial
183 fi
184 286
185 4. Reboot and check if mxser.o activated by "lsmod" command. 287 3.4.5. If you'd like to drive Smartio/Industio ISA boards in the system,
186 5. If you'd like to drive Smartio ISA boards in the system, you'll 288 you'll have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given
187 have to add parameter to specify CAP address of given board while 289 board while activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are
188 activating "mxser.o". The format for parameters are as follows. 290 as follows.
189 291
190 insmod mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x??? 292 modprobe mxser ioaddr=0x???,0x???,0x???,0x???
191 | | | | 293 | | | |
192 | | | +- 4th ISA board 294 | | | +- 4th ISA board
193 | | +------ 3rd ISA board 295 | | +------ 3rd ISA board
194 | +------------ 2nd ISA board 296 | +------------ 2nd ISA board
195 +------------------- 1st ISA board 297 +------------------- 1st ISA board
196 298
197 3.4 Static driver configuration 299 3.5 Static driver configuration for Linux kernel 2.4.x and 2.6.x
300
301 Note: To use static driver, you must install the linux kernel
302 source package.
303
304 3.5.1 Backup the built-in driver in the kernel.
305 # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
306 # mv mxser.c mxser.c.old
307
308 For Red Hat 7.x user, you need to create link:
309 # cd /usr/src
310 # ln -s linux-2.4 linux
198 311
199 1. Create link 312 3.5.2 Create link
200 # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char 313 # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
201 # ln -s /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c mxser.c 314 # ln -s /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c mxser.c
202 315
203 2. Add CAP address list for ISA boards 316 3.5.3 Add CAP address list for ISA boards. For PCI boards user,
317 please skip this step.
318
204 In module mode, the CAP address for ISA board is given by 319 In module mode, the CAP address for ISA board is given by
205 parameter. In static driver configuration, you'll have to 320 parameter. In static driver configuration, you'll have to
206 assign it within driver's source code. If you will not 321 assign it within driver's source code. If you will not
@@ -222,73 +337,55 @@ Content
222 static int mxserBoardCAP[] 337 static int mxserBoardCAP[]
223 = {0x280, 0x180, 0x00, 0x00}; 338 = {0x280, 0x180, 0x00, 0x00};
224 339
225 3. Modify tty_io.c 340 3.5.4 Setup kernel configuration
226 # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char/
227 # vi tty_io.c
228 Find pty_init(), insert "mxser_init()" as
229 341
230 pty_init(); 342 Configure the kernel:
231 mxser_init();
232 343
233 4. Modify tty.h 344 # cd /usr/src/linux
234 # cd /usr/src/linux/include/linux 345 # make menuconfig
235 # vi tty.h
236 Find extern int tty_init(void), insert "mxser_init()" as
237 346
238 extern int tty_init(void); 347 You will go into a menu-driven system. Please select [Character
239 extern int mxser_init(void); 348 devices][Non-standard serial port support], enable the [Moxa
240 349 SmartIO support] driver with "[*]" for built-in (not "[M]"), then
241 5. Modify Makefile 350 select [Exit] to exit this program.
242 # cd /usr/src/linux/drivers/char
243 # vi Makefile
244 Find L_OBJS := tty_io.o ...... random.o, add
245 "mxser.o" at last of this line as
246 L_OBJS := tty_io.o ....... mxser.o
247 351
248 6. Rebuild kernel 352 3.5.5 Rebuild kernel
249 The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding,for your reference only. 353 The following are for Linux kernel rebuilding, for your
354 reference only.
250 For appropriate details, please refer to the Linux document. 355 For appropriate details, please refer to the Linux document.
251 356
252 If 'lilo' utility is installed, please use 'make zlilo' to rebuild
253 kernel. If 'lilo' is not installed, please follow the following steps.
254
255 a. cd /usr/src/linux 357 a. cd /usr/src/linux
256 b. make clean /* take a few minutes */ 358 b. make clean /* take a few minutes */
257 c. make bzImage /* take probably 10-20 minutes */ 359 c. make dep /* take a few minutes */
258 d. Backup original boot kernel. /* optional step */ 360 d. make bzImage /* take probably 10-20 minutes */
259 e. cp /usr/src/linux/arch/i386/boot/bzImage /boot/vmlinuz 361 e. make install /* copy boot image to correct position */
260 f. Please make sure the boot kernel (vmlinuz) is in the 362 f. Please make sure the boot kernel (vmlinuz) is in the
261 correct position. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should 363 correct position.
262 check /etc/lilo.conf 'image' item specified the path 364 g. If you use 'lilo' utility, you should check /etc/lilo.conf
263 which is the 'vmlinuz' path, or you will load wrong 365 'image' item specified the path which is the 'vmlinuz' path,
264 (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz). 366 or you will load wrong (or old) boot kernel image (vmlinuz).
265 g. chmod 400 /vmlinuz 367 After checking /etc/lilo.conf, please run "lilo".
266 h. lilo 368
267 i. rdev -R /vmlinuz 1 369 Note that if the result of "make bzImage" is ERROR, then you have to
268 j. sync 370 go back to Linux configuration Setup. Type "make menuconfig" in
269 371 directory /usr/src/linux.
270 Note that if the result of "make zImage" is ERROR, then you have to 372
271 go back to Linux configuration Setup. Type "make config" in directory 373
272 /usr/src/linux or "setup". 374 3.5.6 Make tty device and special file
273
274 Since system include file, /usr/src/linux/include/linux/interrupt.h,
275 is modified each time the MOXA driver is installed, kernel rebuilding
276 is inevitable. And it takes about 10 to 20 minutes depends on the
277 machine.
278
279 7. Make utility
280 # cd /moxa/mxser/utility
281 # make install
282
283 8. Make special file
284 # cd /moxa/mxser/driver 375 # cd /moxa/mxser/driver
285 # ./msmknod 376 # ./msmknod
286 377
287 9. Reboot 378 3.5.7 Make utility
379 # cd /moxa/mxser/utility
380 # make clean; make install
381
382 3.5.8 Reboot
288 383
289 3.5 Custom configuration 384
385
386 3.6 Custom configuration
290 Although this driver already provides you default configuration, you 387 Although this driver already provides you default configuration, you
291 still can change the device name and major number.The instruction to 388 still can change the device name and major number. The instruction to
292 change these parameters are shown as below. 389 change these parameters are shown as below.
293 390
294 Change Device name 391 Change Device name
@@ -306,33 +403,37 @@ Content
306 2 free major numbers for this driver. There are 3 steps to change 403 2 free major numbers for this driver. There are 3 steps to change
307 major numbers. 404 major numbers.
308 405
309 1. Find free major numbers 406 3.6.1 Find free major numbers
310 In /proc/devices, you may find all the major numbers occupied 407 In /proc/devices, you may find all the major numbers occupied
311 in the system. Please select 2 major numbers that are available. 408 in the system. Please select 2 major numbers that are available.
312 e.g. 40, 45. 409 e.g. 40, 45.
313 2. Create special files 410 3.6.2 Create special files
314 Run /moxa/mxser/driver/msmknod to create special files with 411 Run /moxa/mxser/driver/msmknod to create special files with
315 specified major numbers. 412 specified major numbers.
316 3. Modify driver with new major number 413 3.6.3 Modify driver with new major number
317 Run vi to open /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c. Locate the line 414 Run vi to open /moxa/mxser/driver/mxser.c. Locate the line
318 contains "MXSERMAJOR". Change the content as below. 415 contains "MXSERMAJOR". Change the content as below.
319 #define MXSERMAJOR 40 416 #define MXSERMAJOR 40
320 #define MXSERCUMAJOR 45 417 #define MXSERCUMAJOR 45
321 4. Run # make install in /moxa/mxser/driver. 418 3.6.4 Run "make clean; make install" in /moxa/mxser/driver.
322 419
323 3.6 Verify driver installation 420 3.7 Verify driver installation
324 You may refer to /var/log/messages to check the latest status 421 You may refer to /var/log/messages to check the latest status
325 log reported by this driver whenever it's activated. 422 log reported by this driver whenever it's activated.
423
326----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 424-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3274. Utilities 4254. Utilities
328 There are 3 utilities contained in this driver. They are msdiag, msmon and 426 There are 3 utilities contained in this driver. They are msdiag, msmon and
329 msterm. These 3 utilities are released in form of source code. They should 427 msterm. These 3 utilities are released in form of source code. They should
330 be compiled into executable file and copied into /usr/bin. 428 be compiled into executable file and copied into /usr/bin.
331 429
430 Before using these utilities, please load driver (refer 3.4 & 3.5) and
431 make sure you had run the "msmknod" utility.
432
332 msdiag - Diagnostic 433 msdiag - Diagnostic
333 -------------------- 434 --------------------
334 This utility provides the function to detect what Moxa Smartio multiport 435 This utility provides the function to display what Moxa Smartio/Industio
335 board exists in the system. 436 board found by driver in the system.
336 437
337 msmon - Port Monitoring 438 msmon - Port Monitoring
338 ----------------------- 439 -----------------------
@@ -353,12 +454,13 @@ Content
353 application, for example, sending AT command to a modem connected to the 454 application, for example, sending AT command to a modem connected to the
354 port or used as a terminal for login purpose. Note that this is only a 455 port or used as a terminal for login purpose. Note that this is only a
355 dumb terminal emulation without handling full screen operation. 456 dumb terminal emulation without handling full screen operation.
457
356----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 458-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3575. Setserial 4595. Setserial
358 460
359 Supported Setserial parameters are listed as below. 461 Supported Setserial parameters are listed as below.
360 462
361 uart set UART type(16450-->disable FIFO, 16550A-->enable FIFO) 463 uart set UART type(16450-->disable FIFO, 16550A-->enable FIFO)
362 close_delay set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that DTR 464 close_delay set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that DTR
363 should be kept low while being closed. 465 should be kept low while being closed.
364 closing_wait set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that the 466 closing_wait set the amount of time(in 1/100 of a second) that the
@@ -366,7 +468,13 @@ Content
366 being closed, before the receiver is disable. 468 being closed, before the receiver is disable.
367 spd_hi Use 57.6kb when the application requests 38.4kb. 469 spd_hi Use 57.6kb when the application requests 38.4kb.
368 spd_vhi Use 115.2kb when the application requests 38.4kb. 470 spd_vhi Use 115.2kb when the application requests 38.4kb.
471 spd_shi Use 230.4kb when the application requests 38.4kb.
472 spd_warp Use 460.8kb when the application requests 38.4kb.
369 spd_normal Use 38.4kb when the application requests 38.4kb. 473 spd_normal Use 38.4kb when the application requests 38.4kb.
474 spd_cust Use the custom divisor to set the speed when the
475 application requests 38.4kb.
476 divisor This option set the custom divison.
477 baud_base This option set the base baud rate.
370 478
371----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 479-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3726. Troubleshooting 4806. Troubleshooting
@@ -375,8 +483,9 @@ Content
375 possible. If all the possible solutions fail, please contact our technical 483 possible. If all the possible solutions fail, please contact our technical
376 support team to get more help. 484 support team to get more help.
377 485
378 Error msg: More than 4 Moxa Smartio family boards found. Fifth board and 486
379 after are ignored. 487 Error msg: More than 4 Moxa Smartio/Industio family boards found. Fifth board
488 and after are ignored.
380 Solution: 489 Solution:
381 To avoid this problem, please unplug fifth and after board, because Moxa 490 To avoid this problem, please unplug fifth and after board, because Moxa
382 driver supports up to 4 boards. 491 driver supports up to 4 boards.
@@ -384,7 +493,7 @@ Content
384 Error msg: Request_irq fail, IRQ(?) may be conflict with another device. 493 Error msg: Request_irq fail, IRQ(?) may be conflict with another device.
385 Solution: 494 Solution:
386 Other PCI or ISA devices occupy the assigned IRQ. If you are not sure 495 Other PCI or ISA devices occupy the assigned IRQ. If you are not sure
387 which device causes the situation,please check /proc/interrupts to find 496 which device causes the situation, please check /proc/interrupts to find
388 free IRQ and simply change another free IRQ for Moxa board. 497 free IRQ and simply change another free IRQ for Moxa board.
389 498
390 Error msg: Board #: C1xx Series(CAP=xxx) interrupt number invalid. 499 Error msg: Board #: C1xx Series(CAP=xxx) interrupt number invalid.
@@ -397,15 +506,18 @@ Content
397 Moxa ISA board needs an interrupt vector.Please refer to user's manual 506 Moxa ISA board needs an interrupt vector.Please refer to user's manual
398 "Hardware Installation" chapter to set interrupt vector. 507 "Hardware Installation" chapter to set interrupt vector.
399 508
400 Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio family driver! 509 Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family driver!
401 Solution: 510 Solution:
402 Load Moxa driver fail, the major number may conflict with other devices. 511 Load Moxa driver fail, the major number may conflict with other devices.
403 Please refer to previous section 3.5 to change a free major number for 512 Please refer to previous section 3.7 to change a free major number for
404 Moxa driver. 513 Moxa driver.
405 514
406 Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio family callout driver! 515 Error msg: Couldn't install MOXA Smartio/Industio family callout driver!
407 Solution: 516 Solution:
408 Load Moxa callout driver fail, the callout device major number may 517 Load Moxa callout driver fail, the callout device major number may
409 conflict with other devices. Please refer to previous section 3.5 to 518 conflict with other devices. Please refer to previous section 3.7 to
410 change a free callout device major number for Moxa driver. 519 change a free callout device major number for Moxa driver.
520
521
411----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 522-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
523
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
index a0cda062bc33..688dfe1e6b70 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
@@ -289,35 +289,73 @@ downdelay
289fail_over_mac 289fail_over_mac
290 290
291 Specifies whether active-backup mode should set all slaves to 291 Specifies whether active-backup mode should set all slaves to
292 the same MAC address (the traditional behavior), or, when 292 the same MAC address at enslavement (the traditional
293 enabled, change the bond's MAC address when changing the 293 behavior), or, when enabled, perform special handling of the
294 active interface (i.e., fail over the MAC address itself). 294 bond's MAC address in accordance with the selected policy.
295 295
296 Fail over MAC is useful for devices that cannot ever alter 296 Possible values are:
297 their MAC address, or for devices that refuse incoming 297
298 broadcasts with their own source MAC (which interferes with 298 none or 0
299 the ARP monitor). 299
300 300 This setting disables fail_over_mac, and causes
301 The down side of fail over MAC is that every device on the 301 bonding to set all slaves of an active-backup bond to
302 network must be updated via gratuitous ARP, vs. just updating 302 the same MAC address at enslavement time. This is the
303 a switch or set of switches (which often takes place for any 303 default.
304 traffic, not just ARP traffic, if the switch snoops incoming 304
305 traffic to update its tables) for the traditional method. If 305 active or 1
306 the gratuitous ARP is lost, communication may be disrupted. 306
307 307 The "active" fail_over_mac policy indicates that the
308 When fail over MAC is used in conjuction with the mii monitor, 308 MAC address of the bond should always be the MAC
309 devices which assert link up prior to being able to actually 309 address of the currently active slave. The MAC
310 transmit and receive are particularly susecptible to loss of 310 address of the slaves is not changed; instead, the MAC
311 the gratuitous ARP, and an appropriate updelay setting may be 311 address of the bond changes during a failover.
312 required. 312
313 313 This policy is useful for devices that cannot ever
314 A value of 0 disables fail over MAC, and is the default. A 314 alter their MAC address, or for devices that refuse
315 value of 1 enables fail over MAC. This option is enabled 315 incoming broadcasts with their own source MAC (which
316 automatically if the first slave added cannot change its MAC 316 interferes with the ARP monitor).
317 address. This option may be modified via sysfs only when no 317
318 slaves are present in the bond. 318 The down side of this policy is that every device on
319 319 the network must be updated via gratuitous ARP,
320 This option was added in bonding version 3.2.0. 320 vs. just updating a switch or set of switches (which
321 often takes place for any traffic, not just ARP
322 traffic, if the switch snoops incoming traffic to
323 update its tables) for the traditional method. If the
324 gratuitous ARP is lost, communication may be
325 disrupted.
326
327 When this policy is used in conjuction with the mii
328 monitor, devices which assert link up prior to being
329 able to actually transmit and receive are particularly
330 susecptible to loss of the gratuitous ARP, and an
331 appropriate updelay setting may be required.
332
333 follow or 2
334
335 The "follow" fail_over_mac policy causes the MAC
336 address of the bond to be selected normally (normally
337 the MAC address of the first slave added to the bond).
338 However, the second and subsequent slaves are not set
339 to this MAC address while they are in a backup role; a
340 slave is programmed with the bond's MAC address at
341 failover time (and the formerly active slave receives
342 the newly active slave's MAC address).
343
344 This policy is useful for multiport devices that
345 either become confused or incur a performance penalty
346 when multiple ports are programmed with the same MAC
347 address.
348
349
350 The default policy is none, unless the first slave cannot
351 change its MAC address, in which case the active policy is
352 selected by default.
353
354 This option may be modified via sysfs only when no slaves are
355 present in the bond.
356
357 This option was added in bonding version 3.2.0. The "follow"
358 policy was added in bonding version 3.3.0.
321 359
322lacp_rate 360lacp_rate
323 361
@@ -338,7 +376,8 @@ max_bonds
338 Specifies the number of bonding devices to create for this 376 Specifies the number of bonding devices to create for this
339 instance of the bonding driver. E.g., if max_bonds is 3, and 377 instance of the bonding driver. E.g., if max_bonds is 3, and
340 the bonding driver is not already loaded, then bond0, bond1 378 the bonding driver is not already loaded, then bond0, bond1
341 and bond2 will be created. The default value is 1. 379 and bond2 will be created. The default value is 1. Specifying
380 a value of 0 will load bonding, but will not create any devices.
342 381
343miimon 382miimon
344 383
@@ -501,6 +540,17 @@ mode
501 swapped with the new curr_active_slave that was 540 swapped with the new curr_active_slave that was
502 chosen. 541 chosen.
503 542
543num_grat_arp
544
545 Specifies the number of gratuitous ARPs to be issued after a
546 failover event. One gratuitous ARP is issued immediately after
547 the failover, subsequent ARPs are sent at a rate of one per link
548 monitor interval (arp_interval or miimon, whichever is active).
549
550 The valid range is 0 - 255; the default value is 1. This option
551 affects only the active-backup mode. This option was added for
552 bonding version 3.3.0.
553
504primary 554primary
505 555
506 A string (eth0, eth2, etc) specifying which slave is the 556 A string (eth0, eth2, etc) specifying which slave is the
@@ -581,7 +631,7 @@ xmit_hash_policy
581 in environments where a layer3 gateway device is 631 in environments where a layer3 gateway device is
582 required to reach most destinations. 632 required to reach most destinations.
583 633
584 This algorithm is 802.3ad complient. 634 This algorithm is 802.3ad compliant.
585 635
586 layer3+4 636 layer3+4
587 637
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/can.txt b/Documentation/networking/can.txt
index 641d2afacffa..297ba7b1ccaf 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/can.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/can.txt
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
186 186
187 The Linux network devices (by default) just can handle the 187 The Linux network devices (by default) just can handle the
188 transmission and reception of media dependent frames. Due to the 188 transmission and reception of media dependent frames. Due to the
189 arbritration on the CAN bus the transmission of a low prio CAN-ID 189 arbitration on the CAN bus the transmission of a low prio CAN-ID
190 may be delayed by the reception of a high prio CAN frame. To 190 may be delayed by the reception of a high prio CAN frame. To
191 reflect the correct* traffic on the node the loopback of the sent 191 reflect the correct* traffic on the node the loopback of the sent
192 data has to be performed right after a successful transmission. If 192 data has to be performed right after a successful transmission. If
@@ -481,7 +481,7 @@ solution for a couple of reasons:
481 - stats_timer: To calculate the Socket CAN core statistics 481 - stats_timer: To calculate the Socket CAN core statistics
482 (e.g. current/maximum frames per second) this 1 second timer is 482 (e.g. current/maximum frames per second) this 1 second timer is
483 invoked at can.ko module start time by default. This timer can be 483 invoked at can.ko module start time by default. This timer can be
484 disabled by using stattimer=0 on the module comandline. 484 disabled by using stattimer=0 on the module commandline.
485 485
486 - debug: (removed since SocketCAN SVN r546) 486 - debug: (removed since SocketCAN SVN r546)
487 487
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dm9000.txt b/Documentation/networking/dm9000.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..65df3dea5561
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/dm9000.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
1DM9000 Network driver
2=====================
3
4Copyright 2008 Simtec Electronics,
5 Ben Dooks <ben@simtec.co.uk> <ben-linux@fluff.org>
6
7
8Introduction
9------------
10
11This file describes how to use the DM9000 platform-device based network driver
12that is contained in the files drivers/net/dm9000.c and drivers/net/dm9000.h.
13
14The driver supports three DM9000 variants, the DM9000E which is the first chip
15supported as well as the newer DM9000A and DM9000B devices. It is currently
16maintained and tested by Ben Dooks, who should be CC: to any patches for this
17driver.
18
19
20Defining the platform device
21----------------------------
22
23The minimum set of resources attached to the platform device are as follows:
24
25 1) The physical address of the address register
26 2) The physical address of the data register
27 3) The IRQ line the device's interrupt pin is connected to.
28
29These resources should be specified in that order, as the ordering of the
30two address regions is important (the driver expects these to be address
31and then data).
32
33An example from arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/mach-bast.c is:
34
35static struct resource bast_dm9k_resource[] = {
36 [0] = {
37 .start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000,
38 .end = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 3,
39 .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM,
40 },
41 [1] = {
42 .start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40,
43 .end = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40 + 0x3f,
44 .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM,
45 },
46 [2] = {
47 .start = IRQ_DM9000,
48 .end = IRQ_DM9000,
49 .flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ | IORESOURCE_IRQ_HIGHLEVEL,
50 }
51};
52
53static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = {
54 .name = "dm9000",
55 .id = 0,
56 .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource),
57 .resource = bast_dm9k_resource,
58};
59
60Note the setting of the IRQ trigger flag in bast_dm9k_resource[2].flags,
61as this will generate a warning if it is not present. The trigger from
62the flags field will be passed to request_irq() when registering the IRQ
63handler to ensure that the IRQ is setup correctly.
64
65This shows a typical platform device, without the optional configuration
66platform data supplied. The next example uses the same resources, but adds
67the optional platform data to pass extra configuration data:
68
69static struct dm9000_plat_data bast_dm9k_platdata = {
70 .flags = DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY,
71};
72
73static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = {
74 .name = "dm9000",
75 .id = 0,
76 .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource),
77 .resource = bast_dm9k_resource,
78 .dev = {
79 .platform_data = &bast_dm9k_platdata,
80 }
81};
82
83The platform data is defined in include/linux/dm9000.h and described below.
84
85
86Platform data
87-------------
88
89Extra platform data for the DM9000 can describe the IO bus width to the
90device, whether or not an external PHY is attached to the device and
91the availability of an external configuration EEPROM.
92
93The flags for the platform data .flags field are as follows:
94
95DM9000_PLATF_8BITONLY
96
97 The IO should be done with 8bit operations.
98
99DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY
100
101 The IO should be done with 16bit operations.
102
103DM9000_PLATF_32BITONLY
104
105 The IO should be done with 32bit operations.
106
107DM9000_PLATF_EXT_PHY
108
109 The chip is connected to an external PHY.
110
111DM9000_PLATF_NO_EEPROM
112
113 This can be used to signify that the board does not have an
114 EEPROM, or that the EEPROM should be hidden from the user.
115
116DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY
117
118 Switch to using the simpler PHY polling method which does not
119 try and read the MII PHY state regularly. This is only available
120 when using the internal PHY. See the section on link state polling
121 for more information.
122
123 The config symbol DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL, Kconfig entry
124 "Force simple NSR based PHY polling" allows this flag to be
125 forced on at build time.
126
127
128PHY Link state polling
129----------------------
130
131The driver keeps track of the link state and informs the network core
132about link (carrier) availablilty. This is managed by several methods
133depending on the version of the chip and on which PHY is being used.
134
135For the internal PHY, the original (and currently default) method is
136to read the MII state, either when the status changes if we have the
137necessary interrupt support in the chip or every two seconds via a
138periodic timer.
139
140To reduce the overhead for the internal PHY, there is now the option
141of using the DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL config, or DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY
142platform data option to read the summary information without the
143expensive MII accesses. This method is faster, but does not print
144as much information.
145
146When using an external PHY, the driver currently has to poll the MII
147link status as there is no method for getting an interrupt on link change.
148
149
150DM9000A / DM9000B
151-----------------
152
153These chips are functionally similar to the DM9000E and are supported easily
154by the same driver. The features are:
155
156 1) Interrupt on internal PHY state change. This means that the periodic
157 polling of the PHY status may be disabled on these devices when using
158 the internal PHY.
159
160 2) TCP/UDP checksum offloading, which the driver does not currently support.
161
162
163ethtool
164-------
165
166The driver supports the ethtool interface for access to the driver
167state information, the PHY state and the EEPROM.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt
index 61b171cf5313..2df71861e578 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/e1000.txt
@@ -513,21 +513,11 @@ Additional Configurations
513 Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Connection 513 Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Connection
514 Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter 514 Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter
515 Intel(R) PRO/1000 PF Dual Port Server Adapter 515 Intel(R) PRO/1000 PF Dual Port Server Adapter
516 Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Quad Port Server Adapter 516 Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Quad Port Server Adapter
517 517
518 NAPI 518 NAPI
519 ---- 519 ----
520 NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the e1000 driver. NAPI is enabled 520 NAPI (Rx polling mode) is enabled in the e1000 driver.
521 or disabled based on the configuration of the kernel. To override
522 the default, use the following compile-time flags.
523
524 To enable NAPI, compile the driver module, passing in a configuration option:
525
526 make CFLAGS_EXTRA=-DE1000_NAPI install
527
528 To disable NAPI, compile the driver module, passing in a configuration option:
529
530 make CFLAGS_EXTRA=-DE1000_NO_NAPI install
531 521
532 See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI. 522 See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI.
533 523
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
index 946b66e1b652..d84932650fd3 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt
@@ -551,8 +551,9 @@ icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts - BOOLEAN
551icmp_ratelimit - INTEGER 551icmp_ratelimit - INTEGER
552 Limit the maximal rates for sending ICMP packets whose type matches 552 Limit the maximal rates for sending ICMP packets whose type matches
553 icmp_ratemask (see below) to specific targets. 553 icmp_ratemask (see below) to specific targets.
554 0 to disable any limiting, otherwise the maximal rate in jiffies(1) 554 0 to disable any limiting,
555 Default: 100 555 otherwise the minimal space between responses in milliseconds.
556 Default: 1000
556 557
557icmp_ratemask - INTEGER 558icmp_ratemask - INTEGER
558 Mask made of ICMP types for which rates are being limited. 559 Mask made of ICMP types for which rates are being limited.
@@ -1023,11 +1024,23 @@ max_addresses - INTEGER
1023 autoconfigured addresses. 1024 autoconfigured addresses.
1024 Default: 16 1025 Default: 16
1025 1026
1027disable_ipv6 - BOOLEAN
1028 Disable IPv6 operation.
1029 Default: FALSE (enable IPv6 operation)
1030
1031accept_dad - INTEGER
1032 Whether to accept DAD (Duplicate Address Detection).
1033 0: Disable DAD
1034 1: Enable DAD (default)
1035 2: Enable DAD, and disable IPv6 operation if MAC-based duplicate
1036 link-local address has been found.
1037
1026icmp/*: 1038icmp/*:
1027ratelimit - INTEGER 1039ratelimit - INTEGER
1028 Limit the maximal rates for sending ICMPv6 packets. 1040 Limit the maximal rates for sending ICMPv6 packets.
1029 0 to disable any limiting, otherwise the maximal rate in jiffies(1) 1041 0 to disable any limiting,
1030 Default: 100 1042 otherwise the minimal space between responses in milliseconds.
1043 Default: 1000
1031 1044
1032 1045
1033IPv6 Update by: 1046IPv6 Update by:
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt b/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt
index 7c98277777eb..a0d0ffb5e584 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/ixgb.txt
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
1Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE Family of Adapters 1Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit Intel(R) Network Connection
2================================================================ 2=============================================================
3 3
4November 17, 2004 4October 9, 2007
5 5
6 6
7Contents 7Contents
@@ -9,94 +9,151 @@ Contents
9 9
10- In This Release 10- In This Release
11- Identifying Your Adapter 11- Identifying Your Adapter
12- Building and Installation
12- Command Line Parameters 13- Command Line Parameters
13- Improving Performance 14- Improving Performance
15- Additional Configurations
16- Known Issues/Troubleshooting
14- Support 17- Support
15 18
16 19
20
17In This Release 21In This Release
18=============== 22===============
19 23
20This file describes the Linux* Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE Family 24This file describes the ixgb Linux Base Driver for the 10 Gigabit Intel(R)
21of Adapters, version 1.0.x. 25Network Connection. This driver includes support for Itanium(R)2-based
26systems.
27
28For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
29supplied with your 10 Gigabit adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply
30to use with Linux.
31
32The following features are available in this kernel:
33 - Native VLANs
34 - Channel Bonding (teaming)
35 - SNMP
36
37Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source:
38/Documentation/networking/bonding.txt
39
40The driver information previously displayed in the /proc filesystem is not
41supported in this release. Alternatively, you can use ethtool (version 1.6
42or later), lspci, and ifconfig to obtain the same information.
43
44Instructions on updating ethtool can be found in the section "Additional
45Configurations" later in this document.
22 46
23For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
24supplied with your Intel PRO/10GbE adapter. All hardware requirements listed
25apply to use with Linux.
26 47
27Identifying Your Adapter 48Identifying Your Adapter
28======================== 49========================
29 50
30To verify your Intel adapter is supported, find the board ID number on the 51The following Intel network adapters are compatible with the drivers in this
31adapter. Look for a label that has a barcode and a number in the format 52release:
32A12345-001. 53
54Controller Adapter Name Physical Layer
55---------- ------------ --------------
5682597EX Intel(R) PRO/10GbE LR/SR/CX4 10G Base-LR (1310 nm optical fiber)
57 Server Adapters 10G Base-SR (850 nm optical fiber)
58 10G Base-CX4(twin-axial copper cabling)
59
60For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter &
61Driver ID Guide at:
62
63 http://support.intel.com/support/network/sb/CS-012904.htm
64
65
66Building and Installation
67=========================
68
69select m for "Intel(R) PRO/10GbE support" located at:
70 Location:
71 -> Device Drivers
72 -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y])
73 -> Ethernet (10000 Mbit) (NETDEV_10000 [=y])
741. make modules && make modules_install
75
762. Load the module:
77
78    modprobe ixgb <parameter>=<value>
79
80 The insmod command can be used if the full
81 path to the driver module is specified. For example:
82
83 insmod /lib/modules/<KERNEL VERSION>/kernel/drivers/net/ixgb/ixgb.ko
84
85 With 2.6 based kernels also make sure that older ixgb drivers are
86 removed from the kernel, before loading the new module:
33 87
34Use the above information and the Adapter & Driver ID Guide at: 88 rmmod ixgb; modprobe ixgb
35 89
36 http://support.intel.com/support/network/adapter/pro100/21397.htm 903. Assign an IP address to the interface by entering the following, where
91 x is the interface number:
37 92
38For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, go to: 93 ifconfig ethx <IP_address>
94
954. Verify that the interface works. Enter the following, where <IP_address>
96 is the IP address for another machine on the same subnet as the interface
97 that is being tested:
98
99 ping <IP_address>
39 100
40 http://downloadfinder.intel.com/scripts-df/support_intel.asp
41 101
42Command Line Parameters 102Command Line Parameters
43======================= 103=======================
44 104
45If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are 105If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are
46used by entering them on the command line with the modprobe or insmod command 106used by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using
47using this syntax: 107this syntax:
48 108
49 modprobe ixgb [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...] 109 modprobe ixgb [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...]
50 110
51 insmod ixgb [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...] 111For example, with two 10GbE PCI adapters, entering:
52 112
53For example, with two PRO/10GbE PCI adapters, entering: 113 modprobe ixgb TxDescriptors=80,128
54 114
55 insmod ixgb TxDescriptors=80,128 115loads the ixgb driver with 80 TX resources for the first adapter and 128 TX
56
57loads the ixgb driver with 80 TX resources for the first adapter and 128 TX
58resources for the second adapter. 116resources for the second adapter.
59 117
60The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, 118The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
61unless otherwise noted. Also, if the driver is statically built into the 119unless otherwise noted.
62kernel, the driver is loaded with the default values for all the parameters.
63Ethtool can be used to change some of the parameters at runtime.
64 120
65FlowControl 121FlowControl
66Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx) 122Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx)
67Default: Read from the EEPROM 123Default: Read from the EEPROM
68 If EEPROM is not detected, default is 3 124 If EEPROM is not detected, default is 1
69 This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx) to 125 This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx) to
70 Ethernet PAUSE frames. 126 Ethernet PAUSE frames. There are hardware bugs associated with enabling
127 Tx flow control so beware.
71 128
72RxDescriptors 129RxDescriptors
73Valid Range: 64-512 130Valid Range: 64-512
74Default Value: 512 131Default Value: 512
75 This value is the number of receive descriptors allocated by the driver. 132 This value is the number of receive descriptors allocated by the driver.
76 Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more incoming packets. 133 Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more incoming packets.
77 Each descriptor is 16 bytes. A receive buffer is also allocated for 134 Each descriptor is 16 bytes. A receive buffer is also allocated for
78 each descriptor and can be either 2048, 4056, 8192, or 16384 bytes, 135 each descriptor and can be either 2048, 4056, 8192, or 16384 bytes,
79 depending on the MTU setting. When the MTU size is 1500 or less, the 136 depending on the MTU setting. When the MTU size is 1500 or less, the
80 receive buffer size is 2048 bytes. When the MTU is greater than 1500 the 137 receive buffer size is 2048 bytes. When the MTU is greater than 1500 the
81 receive buffer size will be either 4056, 8192, or 16384 bytes. The 138 receive buffer size will be either 4056, 8192, or 16384 bytes. The
82 maximum MTU size is 16114. 139 maximum MTU size is 16114.
83 140
84RxIntDelay 141RxIntDelay
85Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off) 142Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
86Default Value: 6 143Default Value: 72
87 This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of 144 This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of
88 0.8192 microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU 145 0.8192 microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU
89 efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing 146 efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing
90 this value adds extra latency to frame reception and can end up 147 this value adds extra latency to frame reception and can end up
91 decreasing the throughput of TCP traffic. If the system is reporting 148 decreasing the throughput of TCP traffic. If the system is reporting
92 dropped receives, this value may be set too high, causing the driver to 149 dropped receives, this value may be set too high, causing the driver to
93 run out of available receive descriptors. 150 run out of available receive descriptors.
94 151
95TxDescriptors 152TxDescriptors
96Valid Range: 64-4096 153Valid Range: 64-4096
97Default Value: 256 154Default Value: 256
98 This value is the number of transmit descriptors allocated by the driver. 155 This value is the number of transmit descriptors allocated by the driver.
99 Increasing this value allows the driver to queue more transmits. Each 156 Increasing this value allows the driver to queue more transmits. Each
100 descriptor is 16 bytes. 157 descriptor is 16 bytes.
101 158
102XsumRX 159XsumRX
@@ -105,51 +162,49 @@ Default Value: 1
105 A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum 162 A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum
106 offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware. 163 offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware.
107 164
108XsumTX
109Valid Range: 0-1
110Default Value: 1
111 A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum
112 offload for transmitted packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter
113 hardware.
114 165
115Improving Performance 166Improving Performance
116===================== 167=====================
117 168
118With the Intel PRO/10 GbE adapter, the default Linux configuration will very 169With the 10 Gigabit server adapters, the default Linux configuration will
119likely limit the total available throughput artificially. There is a set of 170very likely limit the total available throughput artificially. There is a set
120things that when applied together increase the ability of Linux to transmit 171of configuration changes that, when applied together, will increase the ability
121and receive data. The following enhancements were originally acquired from 172of Linux to transmit and receive data. The following enhancements were
122settings published at http://www.spec.org/web99 for various submitted results 173originally acquired from settings published at http://www.spec.org/web99/ for
123using Linux. 174various submitted results using Linux.
124 175
125NOTE: These changes are only suggestions, and serve as a starting point for 176NOTE: These changes are only suggestions, and serve as a starting point for
126tuning your network performance. 177 tuning your network performance.
127 178
128The changes are made in three major ways, listed in order of greatest effect: 179The changes are made in three major ways, listed in order of greatest effect:
129- Use ifconfig to modify the mtu (maximum transmission unit) and the txqueuelen 180- Use ifconfig to modify the mtu (maximum transmission unit) and the txqueuelen
130 parameter. 181 parameter.
131- Use sysctl to modify /proc parameters (essentially kernel tuning) 182- Use sysctl to modify /proc parameters (essentially kernel tuning)
132- Use setpci to modify the MMRBC field in PCI-X configuration space to increase 183- Use setpci to modify the MMRBC field in PCI-X configuration space to increase
133 transmit burst lengths on the bus. 184 transmit burst lengths on the bus.
134 185
135NOTE: setpci modifies the adapter's configuration registers to allow it to read 186NOTE: setpci modifies the adapter's configuration registers to allow it to read
136up to 4k bytes at a time (for transmits). However, for some systems the 187up to 4k bytes at a time (for transmits). However, for some systems the
137behavior after modifying this register may be undefined (possibly errors of some 188behavior after modifying this register may be undefined (possibly errors of
138kind). A power-cycle, hard reset or explicitly setting the e6 register back to 189some kind). A power-cycle, hard reset or explicitly setting the e6 register
13922 (setpci -d 8086:1048 e6.b=22) may be required to get back to a stable 190back to 22 (setpci -d 8086:1a48 e6.b=22) may be required to get back to a
140configuration. 191stable configuration.
141 192
142- COPY these lines and paste them into ixgb_perf.sh: 193- COPY these lines and paste them into ixgb_perf.sh:
143#!/bin/bash 194#!/bin/bash
144echo "configuring network performance , edit this file to change the interface" 195echo "configuring network performance , edit this file to change the interface
196or device ID of 10GbE card"
145# set mmrbc to 4k reads, modify only Intel 10GbE device IDs 197# set mmrbc to 4k reads, modify only Intel 10GbE device IDs
146setpci -d 8086:1048 e6.b=2e 198# replace 1a48 with appropriate 10GbE device's ID installed on the system,
147# set the MTU (max transmission unit) - it requires your switch and clients to change too! 199# if needed.
200setpci -d 8086:1a48 e6.b=2e
201# set the MTU (max transmission unit) - it requires your switch and clients
202# to change as well.
148# set the txqueuelen 203# set the txqueuelen
149# your ixgb adapter should be loaded as eth1 for this to work, change if needed 204# your ixgb adapter should be loaded as eth1 for this to work, change if needed
150ifconfig eth1 mtu 9000 txqueuelen 1000 up 205ifconfig eth1 mtu 9000 txqueuelen 1000 up
151# call the sysctl utility to modify /proc/sys entries 206# call the sysctl utility to modify /proc/sys entries
152sysctl -p ./sysctl_ixgb.conf 207sysctl -p ./sysctl_ixgb.conf
153- END ixgb_perf.sh 208- END ixgb_perf.sh
154 209
155- COPY these lines and paste them into sysctl_ixgb.conf: 210- COPY these lines and paste them into sysctl_ixgb.conf:
@@ -159,54 +214,220 @@ sysctl -p ./sysctl_ixgb.conf
159# several network benchmark tests, your mileage may vary 214# several network benchmark tests, your mileage may vary
160 215
161### IPV4 specific settings 216### IPV4 specific settings
162net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps = 0 # turns TCP timestamp support off, default 1, reduces CPU use 217# turn TCP timestamp support off, default 1, reduces CPU use
163net.ipv4.tcp_sack = 0 # turn SACK support off, default on 218net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps = 0
164# on systems with a VERY fast bus -> memory interface this is the big gainer 219# turn SACK support off, default on
165net.ipv4.tcp_rmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000 # sets min/default/max TCP read buffer, default 4096 87380 174760 220# on systems with a VERY fast bus -> memory interface this is the big gainer
166net.ipv4.tcp_wmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000 # sets min/pressure/max TCP write buffer, default 4096 16384 131072 221net.ipv4.tcp_sack = 0
167net.ipv4.tcp_mem = 10000000 10000000 10000000 # sets min/pressure/max TCP buffer space, default 31744 32256 32768 222# set min/default/max TCP read buffer, default 4096 87380 174760
223net.ipv4.tcp_rmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000
224# set min/pressure/max TCP write buffer, default 4096 16384 131072
225net.ipv4.tcp_wmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000
226# set min/pressure/max TCP buffer space, default 31744 32256 32768
227net.ipv4.tcp_mem = 10000000 10000000 10000000
168 228
169### CORE settings (mostly for socket and UDP effect) 229### CORE settings (mostly for socket and UDP effect)
170net.core.rmem_max = 524287 # maximum receive socket buffer size, default 131071 230# set maximum receive socket buffer size, default 131071
171net.core.wmem_max = 524287 # maximum send socket buffer size, default 131071 231net.core.rmem_max = 524287
172net.core.rmem_default = 524287 # default receive socket buffer size, default 65535 232# set maximum send socket buffer size, default 131071
173net.core.wmem_default = 524287 # default send socket buffer size, default 65535 233net.core.wmem_max = 524287
174net.core.optmem_max = 524287 # maximum amount of option memory buffers, default 10240 234# set default receive socket buffer size, default 65535
175net.core.netdev_max_backlog = 300000 # number of unprocessed input packets before kernel starts dropping them, default 300 235net.core.rmem_default = 524287
236# set default send socket buffer size, default 65535
237net.core.wmem_default = 524287
238# set maximum amount of option memory buffers, default 10240
239net.core.optmem_max = 524287
240# set number of unprocessed input packets before kernel starts dropping them; default 300
241net.core.netdev_max_backlog = 300000
176- END sysctl_ixgb.conf 242- END sysctl_ixgb.conf
177 243
178Edit the ixgb_perf.sh script if necessary to change eth1 to whatever interface 244Edit the ixgb_perf.sh script if necessary to change eth1 to whatever interface
179your ixgb driver is using. 245your ixgb driver is using and/or replace '1a48' with appropriate 10GbE device's
246ID installed on the system.
180 247
181NOTE: Unless these scripts are added to the boot process, these changes will 248NOTE: Unless these scripts are added to the boot process, these changes will
182only last only until the next system reboot. 249 only last only until the next system reboot.
183 250
184 251
185Resolving Slow UDP Traffic 252Resolving Slow UDP Traffic
186-------------------------- 253--------------------------
254If your server does not seem to be able to receive UDP traffic as fast as it
255can receive TCP traffic, it could be because Linux, by default, does not set
256the network stack buffers as large as they need to be to support high UDP
257transfer rates. One way to alleviate this problem is to allow more memory to
258be used by the IP stack to store incoming data.
187 259
188If your server does not seem to be able to receive UDP traffic as fast as it 260For instance, use the commands:
189can receive TCP traffic, it could be because Linux, by default, does not set
190the network stack buffers as large as they need to be to support high UDP
191transfer rates. One way to alleviate this problem is to allow more memory to
192be used by the IP stack to store incoming data.
193
194For instance, use the commands:
195 sysctl -w net.core.rmem_max=262143 261 sysctl -w net.core.rmem_max=262143
196and 262and
197 sysctl -w net.core.rmem_default=262143 263 sysctl -w net.core.rmem_default=262143
198to increase the read buffer memory max and default to 262143 (256k - 1) from 264to increase the read buffer memory max and default to 262143 (256k - 1) from
199defaults of max=131071 (128k - 1) and default=65535 (64k - 1). These variables 265defaults of max=131071 (128k - 1) and default=65535 (64k - 1). These variables
200will increase the amount of memory used by the network stack for receives, and 266will increase the amount of memory used by the network stack for receives, and
201can be increased significantly more if necessary for your application. 267can be increased significantly more if necessary for your application.
202 268
269
270Additional Configurations
271=========================
272
273 Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions
274 -------------------------------------------------
275 Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started is
276 distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves adding
277 an alias line to /etc/modprobe.conf as well as editing other system startup
278 scripts and/or configuration files. Many popular Linux distributions ship
279 with tools to make these changes for you. To learn the proper way to
280 configure a network device for your system, refer to your distribution
281 documentation. If during this process you are asked for the driver or module
282 name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for the Intel 10GbE Family of
283 Adapters is ixgb.
284
285 Viewing Link Messages
286 ---------------------
287 Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is
288 restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on
289 your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following:
290
291 dmesg -n 8
292
293 NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots.
294
295
296 Jumbo Frames
297 ------------
298 The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters. Jumbo Frames support is
299 enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than the default of 1500.
300 The maximum value for the MTU is 16114. Use the ifconfig command to
301 increase the MTU size. For example:
302
303 ifconfig ethx mtu 9000 up
304
305 The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 16114. This value coincides
306 with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 16128.
307
308
309 Ethtool
310 -------
311 The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
312 diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. Ethtool
313 version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality.
314
315 The latest release of ethtool can be found from
316 http://sourceforge.net/projects/gkernel
317
318 NOTE: Ethtool 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options. Support
319 for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by upgrading
320 to the latest version.
321
322
323 NAPI
324 ----
325
326 NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the ixgb driver. NAPI is enabled
327 or disabled based on the configuration of the kernel. see CONFIG_IXGB_NAPI
328
329 See www.cyberus.ca/~hadi/usenix-paper.tgz for more information on NAPI.
330
331
332Known Issues/Troubleshooting
333============================
334
335 NOTE: After installing the driver, if your Intel Network Connection is not
336 working, verify in the "In This Release" section of the readme that you have
337 installed the correct driver.
338
339 Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4 Server Adapter Cable Interoperability Issue with
340 Fujitsu XENPAK Module in SmartBits Chassis
341 ---------------------------------------------------------------------
342 Excessive CRC errors may be observed if the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4
343 Server adapter is connected to a Fujitsu XENPAK CX4 module in a SmartBits
344 chassis using 15 m/24AWG cable assemblies manufactured by Fujitsu or Leoni.
345 The CRC errors may be received either by the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4
346 Server adapter or the SmartBits. If this situation occurs using a different
347 cable assembly may resolve the issue.
348
349 CX4 Server Adapter Cable Interoperability Issues with HP Procurve 3400cl
350 Switch Port
351 ------------------------------------------------------------------------
352 Excessive CRC errors may be observed if the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4 Server
353 adapter is connected to an HP Procurve 3400cl switch port using short cables
354 (1 m or shorter). If this situation occurs, using a longer cable may resolve
355 the issue.
356
357 Excessive CRC errors may be observed using Fujitsu 24AWG cable assemblies that
358 Are 10 m or longer or where using a Leoni 15 m/24AWG cable assembly. The CRC
359 errors may be received either by the CX4 Server adapter or at the switch. If
360 this situation occurs, using a different cable assembly may resolve the issue.
361
362
363 Jumbo Frames System Requirement
364 -------------------------------
365 Memory allocation failures have been observed on Linux systems with 64 MB
366 of RAM or less that are running Jumbo Frames. If you are using Jumbo
367 Frames, your system may require more than the advertised minimum
368 requirement of 64 MB of system memory.
369
370
371 Performance Degradation with Jumbo Frames
372 -----------------------------------------
373 Degradation in throughput performance may be observed in some Jumbo frames
374 environments. If this is observed, increasing the application's socket buffer
375 size and/or increasing the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_*mem entry values may help.
376 See the specific application manual and /usr/src/linux*/Documentation/
377 networking/ip-sysctl.txt for more details.
378
379
380 Allocating Rx Buffers when Using Jumbo Frames
381 ---------------------------------------------
382 Allocating Rx buffers when using Jumbo Frames on 2.6.x kernels may fail if
383 the available memory is heavily fragmented. This issue may be seen with PCI-X
384 adapters or with packet split disabled. This can be reduced or eliminated
385 by changing the amount of available memory for receive buffer allocation, by
386 increasing /proc/sys/vm/min_free_kbytes.
387
388
389 Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network
390 ------------------------------------------------------
391 Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have
392 one system on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain
393 (non-partitioned switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces
394 will respond to IP traffic for any IP address assigned to the system.
395 This results in unbalanced receive traffic.
396
397 If you have multiple interfaces in a server, do either of the following:
398
399 - Turn on ARP filtering by entering:
400 echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter
401
402 - Install the interfaces in separate broadcast domains - either in
403 different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs.
404
405
406 UDP Stress Test Dropped Packet Issue
407 --------------------------------------
408 Under small packets UDP stress test with 10GbE driver, the Linux system
409 may drop UDP packets due to the fullness of socket buffers. You may want
410 to change the driver's Flow Control variables to the minimum value for
411 controlling packet reception.
412
413
414 Tx Hangs Possible Under Stress
415 ------------------------------
416 Under stress conditions, if TX hangs occur, turning off TSO
417 "ethtool -K eth0 tso off" may resolve the problem.
418
419
203Support 420Support
204======= 421=======
205 422
206For general information and support, go to the Intel support website at: 423For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
207 424
208 http://support.intel.com 425 http://support.intel.com
209 426
427or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
428
429 http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
430
210If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported 431If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported
211kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to 432kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related
212the issue to linux.nics@intel.com. 433to the issue to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/README b/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/README
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2ff8ccb8dc37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/README
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
1mac80211_hwsim - software simulator of 802.11 radio(s) for mac80211
2Copyright (c) 2008, Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
3
4This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
5it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
6published by the Free Software Foundation.
7
8
9Introduction
10
11mac80211_hwsim is a Linux kernel module that can be used to simulate
12arbitrary number of IEEE 802.11 radios for mac80211. It can be used to
13test most of the mac80211 functionality and user space tools (e.g.,
14hostapd and wpa_supplicant) in a way that matches very closely with
15the normal case of using real WLAN hardware. From the mac80211 view
16point, mac80211_hwsim is yet another hardware driver, i.e., no changes
17to mac80211 are needed to use this testing tool.
18
19The main goal for mac80211_hwsim is to make it easier for developers
20to test their code and work with new features to mac80211, hostapd,
21and wpa_supplicant. The simulated radios do not have the limitations
22of real hardware, so it is easy to generate an arbitrary test setup
23and always reproduce the same setup for future tests. In addition,
24since all radio operation is simulated, any channel can be used in
25tests regardless of regulatory rules.
26
27mac80211_hwsim kernel module has a parameter 'radios' that can be used
28to select how many radios are simulated (default 2). This allows
29configuration of both very simply setups (e.g., just a single access
30point and a station) or large scale tests (multiple access points with
31hundreds of stations).
32
33mac80211_hwsim works by tracking the current channel of each virtual
34radio and copying all transmitted frames to all other radios that are
35currently enabled and on the same channel as the transmitting
36radio. Software encryption in mac80211 is used so that the frames are
37actually encrypted over the virtual air interface to allow more
38complete testing of encryption.
39
40A global monitoring netdev, hwsim#, is created independent of
41mac80211. This interface can be used to monitor all transmitted frames
42regardless of channel.
43
44
45Simple example
46
47This example shows how to use mac80211_hwsim to simulate two radios:
48one to act as an access point and the other as a station that
49associates with the AP. hostapd and wpa_supplicant are used to take
50care of WPA2-PSK authentication. In addition, hostapd is also
51processing access point side of association.
52
53Please note that the current Linux kernel does not enable AP mode, so a
54simple patch is needed to enable AP mode selection:
55http://johannes.sipsolutions.net/patches/kernel/all/LATEST/006-allow-ap-vlan-modes.patch
56
57
58# Build mac80211_hwsim as part of kernel configuration
59
60# Load the module
61modprobe mac80211_hwsim
62
63# Run hostapd (AP) for wlan0
64hostapd hostapd.conf
65
66# Run wpa_supplicant (station) for wlan1
67wpa_supplicant -Dwext -iwlan1 -c wpa_supplicant.conf
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/hostapd.conf b/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/hostapd.conf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..08cde7e35f2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/hostapd.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
1interface=wlan0
2driver=nl80211
3
4hw_mode=g
5channel=1
6ssid=mac80211 test
7
8wpa=2
9wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-PSK
10wpa_pairwise=CCMP
11wpa_passphrase=12345678
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/wpa_supplicant.conf b/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/wpa_supplicant.conf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..299128cff035
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/mac80211_hwsim/wpa_supplicant.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
1ctrl_interface=/var/run/wpa_supplicant
2
3network={
4 ssid="mac80211 test"
5 psk="12345678"
6 key_mgmt=WPA-PSK
7 proto=WPA2
8 pairwise=CCMP
9 group=CCMP
10}
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
index ea5a42e8f79f..d391ea631141 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/multiqueue.txt
@@ -3,19 +3,11 @@
3 =========================================== 3 ===========================================
4 4
5Section 1: Base driver requirements for implementing multiqueue support 5Section 1: Base driver requirements for implementing multiqueue support
6Section 2: Qdisc support for multiqueue devices
7Section 3: Brief howto using PRIO or RR for multiqueue devices
8
9 6
10Intro: Kernel support for multiqueue devices 7Intro: Kernel support for multiqueue devices
11--------------------------------------------------------- 8---------------------------------------------------------
12 9
13Kernel support for multiqueue devices is only an API that is presented to the 10Kernel support for multiqueue devices is always present.
14netdevice layer for base drivers to implement. This feature is part of the
15core networking stack, and all network devices will be running on the
16multiqueue-aware stack. If a base driver only has one queue, then these
17changes are transparent to that driver.
18
19 11
20Section 1: Base driver requirements for implementing multiqueue support 12Section 1: Base driver requirements for implementing multiqueue support
21----------------------------------------------------------------------- 13-----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -32,84 +24,4 @@ netif_{start|stop|wake}_subqueue() functions to manage each queue while the
32device is still operational. netdev->queue_lock is still used when the device 24device is still operational. netdev->queue_lock is still used when the device
33comes online or when it's completely shut down (unregister_netdev(), etc.). 25comes online or when it's completely shut down (unregister_netdev(), etc.).
34 26
35Finally, the base driver should indicate that it is a multiqueue device. The
36feature flag NETIF_F_MULTI_QUEUE should be added to the netdev->features
37bitmap on device initialization. Below is an example from e1000:
38
39#ifdef CONFIG_E1000_MQ
40 if ( (adapter->hw.mac.type == e1000_82571) ||
41 (adapter->hw.mac.type == e1000_82572) ||
42 (adapter->hw.mac.type == e1000_80003es2lan))
43 netdev->features |= NETIF_F_MULTI_QUEUE;
44#endif
45
46
47Section 2: Qdisc support for multiqueue devices
48-----------------------------------------------
49
50Currently two qdiscs support multiqueue devices. A new round-robin qdisc,
51sch_rr, and sch_prio. The qdisc is responsible for classifying the skb's to
52bands and queues, and will store the queue mapping into skb->queue_mapping.
53Use this field in the base driver to determine which queue to send the skb
54to.
55
56sch_rr has been added for hardware that doesn't want scheduling policies from
57software, so it's a straight round-robin qdisc. It uses the same syntax and
58classification priomap that sch_prio uses, so it should be intuitive to
59configure for people who've used sch_prio.
60
61In order to utilitize the multiqueue features of the qdiscs, the network
62device layer needs to enable multiple queue support. This can be done by
63selecting NETDEVICES_MULTIQUEUE under Drivers.
64
65The PRIO qdisc naturally plugs into a multiqueue device. If
66NETDEVICES_MULTIQUEUE is selected, then on qdisc load, the number of
67bands requested is compared to the number of queues on the hardware. If they
68are equal, it sets a one-to-one mapping up between the queues and bands. If
69they're not equal, it will not load the qdisc. This is the same behavior
70for RR. Once the association is made, any skb that is classified will have
71skb->queue_mapping set, which will allow the driver to properly queue skb's
72to multiple queues.
73
74
75Section 3: Brief howto using PRIO and RR for multiqueue devices
76---------------------------------------------------------------
77
78The userspace command 'tc,' part of the iproute2 package, is used to configure
79qdiscs. To add the PRIO qdisc to your network device, assuming the device is
80called eth0, run the following command:
81
82# tc qdisc add dev eth0 root handle 1: prio bands 4 multiqueue
83
84This will create 4 bands, 0 being highest priority, and associate those bands
85to the queues on your NIC. Assuming eth0 has 4 Tx queues, the band mapping
86would look like:
87
88band 0 => queue 0
89band 1 => queue 1
90band 2 => queue 2
91band 3 => queue 3
92
93Traffic will begin flowing through each queue if your TOS values are assigning
94traffic across the various bands. For example, ssh traffic will always try to
95go out band 0 based on TOS -> Linux priority conversion (realtime traffic),
96so it will be sent out queue 0. ICMP traffic (pings) fall into the "normal"
97traffic classification, which is band 1. Therefore pings will be send out
98queue 1 on the NIC.
99
100Note the use of the multiqueue keyword. This is only in versions of iproute2
101that support multiqueue networking devices; if this is omitted when loading
102a qdisc onto a multiqueue device, the qdisc will load and operate the same
103if it were loaded onto a single-queue device (i.e. - sends all traffic to
104queue 0).
105
106Another alternative to multiqueue band allocation can be done by using the
107multiqueue option and specify 0 bands. If this is the case, the qdisc will
108allocate the number of bands to equal the number of queues that the device
109reports, and bring the qdisc online.
110
111The behavior of tc filters remains the same, where it will override TOS priority
112classification.
113
114
115Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. <peter.p.waskiewicz.jr@intel.com> 27Author: Peter P. Waskiewicz Jr. <peter.p.waskiewicz.jr@intel.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt
index db0cd5169581..07c53d596035 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/packet_mmap.txt
@@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ just one call to mmap is needed:
326 mmap(0, size, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0); 326 mmap(0, size, PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE, MAP_SHARED, fd, 0);
327 327
328If tp_frame_size is a divisor of tp_block_size frames will be 328If tp_frame_size is a divisor of tp_block_size frames will be
329contiguosly spaced by tp_frame_size bytes. If not, each 329contiguously spaced by tp_frame_size bytes. If not, each
330tp_block_size/tp_frame_size frames there will be a gap between 330tp_block_size/tp_frame_size frames there will be a gap between
331the frames. This is because a frame cannot be spawn across two 331the frames. This is because a frame cannot be spawn across two
332blocks. 332blocks.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt b/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt
index 1e28e2ddb90a..c3d6b4d5d014 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/s2io.txt
@@ -52,13 +52,10 @@ d. MSI/MSI-X. Can be enabled on platforms which support this feature
52(IA64, Xeon) resulting in noticeable performance improvement(upto 7% 52(IA64, Xeon) resulting in noticeable performance improvement(upto 7%
53on certain platforms). 53on certain platforms).
54 54
55e. NAPI. Compile-time option(CONFIG_S2IO_NAPI) for better Rx interrupt 55e. Statistics. Comprehensive MAC-level and software statistics displayed
56moderation.
57
58f. Statistics. Comprehensive MAC-level and software statistics displayed
59using "ethtool -S" option. 56using "ethtool -S" option.
60 57
61g. Multi-FIFO/Ring. Supports up to 8 transmit queues and receive rings, 58f. Multi-FIFO/Ring. Supports up to 8 transmit queues and receive rings,
62with multiple steering options. 59with multiple steering options.
63 60
644. Command line parameters 614. Command line parameters
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt b/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt
index 01e716d185f4..dcadf6f88e34 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/tc-actions-env-rules.txt
@@ -4,26 +4,27 @@ The "enviromental" rules for authors of any new tc actions are:
41) If you stealeth or borroweth any packet thou shalt be branching 41) If you stealeth or borroweth any packet thou shalt be branching
5from the righteous path and thou shalt cloneth. 5from the righteous path and thou shalt cloneth.
6 6
7For example if your action queues a packet to be processed later 7For example if your action queues a packet to be processed later,
8or intentionaly branches by redirecting a packet then you need to 8or intentionally branches by redirecting a packet, then you need to
9clone the packet. 9clone the packet.
10
10There are certain fields in the skb tc_verd that need to be reset so we 11There are certain fields in the skb tc_verd that need to be reset so we
11avoid loops etc. A few are generic enough so much so that skb_act_clone() 12avoid loops, etc. A few are generic enough that skb_act_clone()
12resets them for you. So invoke skb_act_clone() rather than skb_clone() 13resets them for you, so invoke skb_act_clone() rather than skb_clone().
13 14
142) If you munge any packet thou shalt call pskb_expand_head in the case 152) If you munge any packet thou shalt call pskb_expand_head in the case
15someone else is referencing the skb. After that you "own" the skb. 16someone else is referencing the skb. After that you "own" the skb.
16You must also tell us if it is ok to munge the packet (TC_OK2MUNGE), 17You must also tell us if it is ok to munge the packet (TC_OK2MUNGE),
17this way any action downstream can stomp on the packet. 18this way any action downstream can stomp on the packet.
18 19
193) dropping packets you dont own is a nono. You simply return 203) Dropping packets you don't own is a no-no. You simply return
20TC_ACT_SHOT to the caller and they will drop it. 21TC_ACT_SHOT to the caller and they will drop it.
21 22
22The "enviromental" rules for callers of actions (qdiscs etc) are: 23The "enviromental" rules for callers of actions (qdiscs etc) are:
23 24
24*) thou art responsible for freeing anything returned as being 25*) Thou art responsible for freeing anything returned as being
25TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED. If none of TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED is 26TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED. If none of TC_ACT_SHOT/STOLEN/QUEUED is
26returned then all is great and you dont need to do anything. 27returned, then all is great and you don't need to do anything.
27 28
28Post on netdev if something is unclear. 29Post on netdev if something is unclear.
29 30
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/udplite.txt b/Documentation/networking/udplite.txt
index 3870f280280b..855d8da57a23 100644
--- a/Documentation/networking/udplite.txt
+++ b/Documentation/networking/udplite.txt
@@ -148,7 +148,7 @@
148 getsockopt(sockfd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_NO_CHECK, &value, ...); 148 getsockopt(sockfd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_NO_CHECK, &value, ...);
149 149
150 is meaningless (as in TCP). Packets with a zero checksum field are 150 is meaningless (as in TCP). Packets with a zero checksum field are
151 illegal (cf. RFC 3828, sec. 3.1) will be silently discarded. 151 illegal (cf. RFC 3828, sec. 3.1) and will be silently discarded.
152 152
153 4) Fragmentation 153 4) Fragmentation
154 154
diff --git a/Documentation/power/00-INDEX b/Documentation/power/00-INDEX
index a55d7f1c836d..fb742c213c9e 100644
--- a/Documentation/power/00-INDEX
+++ b/Documentation/power/00-INDEX
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
100-INDEX 100-INDEX
2 - This file 2 - This file
3apm-acpi.txt
4 - basic info about the APM and ACPI support.
3basic-pm-debugging.txt 5basic-pm-debugging.txt
4 - Debugging suspend and resume 6 - Debugging suspend and resume
5devices.txt 7devices.txt
@@ -14,8 +16,6 @@ notifiers.txt
14 - Registering suspend notifiers in device drivers 16 - Registering suspend notifiers in device drivers
15pci.txt 17pci.txt
16 - How the PCI Subsystem Does Power Management 18 - How the PCI Subsystem Does Power Management
17pm.txt
18 - info on Linux power management support.
19pm_qos_interface.txt 19pm_qos_interface.txt
20 - info on Linux PM Quality of Service interface 20 - info on Linux PM Quality of Service interface
21power_supply_class.txt 21power_supply_class.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt b/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1bd799dc17e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/power/apm-acpi.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
1APM or ACPI?
2------------
3If you have a relatively recent x86 mobile, desktop, or server system,
4odds are it supports either Advanced Power Management (APM) or
5Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI). ACPI is the newer
6of the two technologies and puts power management in the hands of the
7operating system, allowing for more intelligent power management than
8is possible with BIOS controlled APM.
9
10The best way to determine which, if either, your system supports is to
11build a kernel with both ACPI and APM enabled (as of 2.3.x ACPI is
12enabled by default). If a working ACPI implementation is found, the
13ACPI driver will override and disable APM, otherwise the APM driver
14will be used.
15
16No, sorry, you cannot have both ACPI and APM enabled and running at
17once. Some people with broken ACPI or broken APM implementations
18would like to use both to get a full set of working features, but you
19simply cannot mix and match the two. Only one power management
20interface can be in control of the machine at once. Think about it..
21
22User-space Daemons
23------------------
24Both APM and ACPI rely on user-space daemons, apmd and acpid
25respectively, to be completely functional. Obtain both of these
26daemons from your Linux distribution or from the Internet (see below)
27and be sure that they are started sometime in the system boot process.
28Go ahead and start both. If ACPI or APM is not available on your
29system the associated daemon will exit gracefully.
30
31 apmd: http://worldvisions.ca/~apenwarr/apmd/
32 acpid: http://acpid.sf.net/
diff --git a/Documentation/power/pm.txt b/Documentation/power/pm.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index be841507e43f..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/power/pm.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,257 +0,0 @@
1 Linux Power Management Support
2
3This document briefly describes how to use power management with your
4Linux system and how to add power management support to Linux drivers.
5
6APM or ACPI?
7------------
8If you have a relatively recent x86 mobile, desktop, or server system,
9odds are it supports either Advanced Power Management (APM) or
10Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI). ACPI is the newer
11of the two technologies and puts power management in the hands of the
12operating system, allowing for more intelligent power management than
13is possible with BIOS controlled APM.
14
15The best way to determine which, if either, your system supports is to
16build a kernel with both ACPI and APM enabled (as of 2.3.x ACPI is
17enabled by default). If a working ACPI implementation is found, the
18ACPI driver will override and disable APM, otherwise the APM driver
19will be used.
20
21No, sorry, you cannot have both ACPI and APM enabled and running at
22once. Some people with broken ACPI or broken APM implementations
23would like to use both to get a full set of working features, but you
24simply cannot mix and match the two. Only one power management
25interface can be in control of the machine at once. Think about it..
26
27User-space Daemons
28------------------
29Both APM and ACPI rely on user-space daemons, apmd and acpid
30respectively, to be completely functional. Obtain both of these
31daemons from your Linux distribution or from the Internet (see below)
32and be sure that they are started sometime in the system boot process.
33Go ahead and start both. If ACPI or APM is not available on your
34system the associated daemon will exit gracefully.
35
36 apmd: http://worldvisions.ca/~apenwarr/apmd/
37 acpid: http://acpid.sf.net/
38
39Driver Interface -- OBSOLETE, DO NOT USE!
40----------------*************************
41
42Note: pm_register(), pm_access(), pm_dev_idle() and friends are
43obsolete. Please do not use them. Instead you should properly hook
44your driver into the driver model, and use its suspend()/resume()
45callbacks to do this kind of stuff.
46
47If you are writing a new driver or maintaining an old driver, it
48should include power management support. Without power management
49support, a single driver may prevent a system with power management
50capabilities from ever being able to suspend (safely).
51
52Overview:
531) Register each instance of a device with "pm_register"
542) Call "pm_access" before accessing the hardware.
55 (this will ensure that the hardware is awake and ready)
563) Your "pm_callback" is called before going into a
57 suspend state (ACPI D1-D3) or after resuming (ACPI D0)
58 from a suspend.
594) Call "pm_dev_idle" when the device is not being used
60 (optional but will improve device idle detection)
615) When unloaded, unregister the device with "pm_unregister"
62
63/*
64 * Description: Register a device with the power-management subsystem
65 *
66 * Parameters:
67 * type - device type (PCI device, system device, ...)
68 * id - instance number or unique identifier
69 * cback - request handler callback (suspend, resume, ...)
70 *
71 * Returns: Registered PM device or NULL on error
72 *
73 * Examples:
74 * dev = pm_register(PM_SYS_DEV, PM_SYS_VGA, vga_callback);
75 *
76 * struct pci_dev *pci_dev = pci_find_dev(...);
77 * dev = pm_register(PM_PCI_DEV, PM_PCI_ID(pci_dev), callback);
78 */
79struct pm_dev *pm_register(pm_dev_t type, unsigned long id, pm_callback cback);
80
81/*
82 * Description: Unregister a device with the power management subsystem
83 *
84 * Parameters:
85 * dev - PM device previously returned from pm_register
86 */
87void pm_unregister(struct pm_dev *dev);
88
89/*
90 * Description: Unregister all devices with a matching callback function
91 *
92 * Parameters:
93 * cback - previously registered request callback
94 *
95 * Notes: Provided for easier porting from old APM interface
96 */
97void pm_unregister_all(pm_callback cback);
98
99/*
100 * Power management request callback
101 *
102 * Parameters:
103 * dev - PM device previously returned from pm_register
104 * rqst - request type
105 * data - data, if any, associated with the request
106 *
107 * Returns: 0 if the request is successful
108 * EINVAL if the request is not supported
109 * EBUSY if the device is now busy and cannot handle the request
110 * ENOMEM if the device was unable to handle the request due to memory
111 *
112 * Details: The device request callback will be called before the
113 * device/system enters a suspend state (ACPI D1-D3) or
114 * or after the device/system resumes from suspend (ACPI D0).
115 * For PM_SUSPEND, the ACPI D-state being entered is passed
116 * as the "data" argument to the callback. The device
117 * driver should save (PM_SUSPEND) or restore (PM_RESUME)
118 * device context when the request callback is called.
119 *
120 * Once a driver returns 0 (success) from a suspend
121 * request, it should not process any further requests or
122 * access the device hardware until a call to "pm_access" is made.
123 */
124typedef int (*pm_callback)(struct pm_dev *dev, pm_request_t rqst, void *data);
125
126Driver Details
127--------------
128This is just a quick Q&A as a stopgap until a real driver writers'
129power management guide is available.
130
131Q: When is a device suspended?
132
133Devices can be suspended based on direct user request (eg. laptop lid
134closes), system power policy (eg. sleep after 30 minutes of console
135inactivity), or device power policy (eg. power down device after 5
136minutes of inactivity)
137
138Q: Must a driver honor a suspend request?
139
140No, a driver can return -EBUSY from a suspend request and this
141will stop the system from suspending. When a suspend request
142fails, all suspended devices are resumed and the system continues
143to run. Suspend can be retried at a later time.
144
145Q: Can the driver block suspend/resume requests?
146
147Yes, a driver can delay its return from a suspend or resume
148request until the device is ready to handle requests. It
149is advantageous to return as quickly as possible from a
150request as suspend/resume are done serially.
151
152Q: What context is a suspend/resume initiated from?
153
154A suspend or resume is initiated from a kernel thread context.
155It is safe to block, allocate memory, initiate requests
156or anything else you can do within the kernel.
157
158Q: Will requests continue to arrive after a suspend?
159
160Possibly. It is the driver's responsibility to queue(*),
161fail, or drop any requests that arrive after returning
162success to a suspend request. It is important that the
163driver not access its device until after it receives
164a resume request as the device's bus may no longer
165be active.
166
167(*) If a driver queues requests for processing after
168 resume be aware that the device, network, etc.
169 might be in a different state than at suspend time.
170 It's probably better to drop requests unless
171 the driver is a storage device.
172
173Q: Do I have to manage bus-specific power management registers
174
175No. It is the responsibility of the bus driver to manage
176PCI, USB, etc. power management registers. The bus driver
177or the power management subsystem will also enable any
178wake-on functionality that the device has.
179
180Q: So, really, what do I need to do to support suspend/resume?
181
182You need to save any device context that would
183be lost if the device was powered off and then restore
184it at resume time. When ACPI is active, there are
185three levels of device suspend states; D1, D2, and D3.
186(The suspend state is passed as the "data" argument
187to the device callback.) With D3, the device is powered
188off and loses all context, D1 and D2 are shallower power
189states and require less device context to be saved. To
190play it safe, just save everything at suspend and restore
191everything at resume.
192
193Q: Where do I store device context for suspend?
194
195Anywhere in memory, kmalloc a buffer or store it
196in the device descriptor. You are guaranteed that the
197contents of memory will be restored and accessible
198before resume, even when the system suspends to disk.
199
200Q: What do I need to do for ACPI vs. APM vs. etc?
201
202Drivers need not be aware of the specific power management
203technology that is active. They just need to be aware
204of when the overlying power management system requests
205that they suspend or resume.
206
207Q: What about device dependencies?
208
209When a driver registers a device, the power management
210subsystem uses the information provided to build a
211tree of device dependencies (eg. USB device X is on
212USB controller Y which is on PCI bus Z) When power
213management wants to suspend a device, it first sends
214a suspend request to its driver, then the bus driver,
215and so on up to the system bus. Device resumes
216proceed in the opposite direction.
217
218Q: Who do I contact for additional information about
219 enabling power management for my specific driver/device?
220
221ACPI Development mailing list: linux-acpi@vger.kernel.org
222
223System Interface -- OBSOLETE, DO NOT USE!
224----------------*************************
225If you are providing new power management support to Linux (ie.
226adding support for something like APM or ACPI), you should
227communicate with drivers through the existing generic power
228management interface.
229
230/*
231 * Send a request to all devices
232 *
233 * Parameters:
234 * rqst - request type
235 * data - data, if any, associated with the request
236 *
237 * Returns: 0 if the request is successful
238 * See "pm_callback" return for errors
239 *
240 * Details: Walk list of registered devices and call pm_send
241 * for each until complete or an error is encountered.
242 * If an error is encountered for a suspend request,
243 * return all devices to the state they were in before
244 * the suspend request.
245 */
246int pm_send_all(pm_request_t rqst, void *data);
247
248/*
249 * Find a matching device
250 *
251 * Parameters:
252 * type - device type (PCI device, system device, or 0 to match all devices)
253 * from - previous match or NULL to start from the beginning
254 *
255 * Returns: Matching device or NULL if none found
256 */
257struct pm_dev *pm_find(pm_dev_t type, struct pm_dev *from);
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
index de2e5c05d6e7..928a79ceb7aa 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/booting-without-of.txt
@@ -41,12 +41,25 @@ Table of Contents
41 VI - System-on-a-chip devices and nodes 41 VI - System-on-a-chip devices and nodes
42 1) Defining child nodes of an SOC 42 1) Defining child nodes of an SOC
43 2) Representing devices without a current OF specification 43 2) Representing devices without a current OF specification
44 a) PHY nodes 44 a) MDIO IO device
45 b) Interrupt controllers 45 b) Gianfar-compatible ethernet nodes
46 c) CFI or JEDEC memory-mapped NOR flash 46 c) PHY nodes
47 d) 4xx/Axon EMAC ethernet nodes 47 d) Interrupt controllers
48 e) Xilinx IP cores 48 e) I2C
49 f) USB EHCI controllers 49 f) Freescale SOC USB controllers
50 g) Freescale SOC SEC Security Engines
51 h) Board Control and Status (BCSR)
52 i) Freescale QUICC Engine module (QE)
53 j) CFI or JEDEC memory-mapped NOR flash
54 k) Global Utilities Block
55 l) Freescale Communications Processor Module
56 m) Chipselect/Local Bus
57 n) 4xx/Axon EMAC ethernet nodes
58 o) Xilinx IP cores
59 p) Freescale Synchronous Serial Interface
60 q) USB EHCI controllers
61 r) MDIO on GPIOs
62 s) SPI busses
50 63
51 VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips 64 VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips
52 1) The /system-controller node 65 1) The /system-controller node
@@ -77,10 +90,12 @@ Table of Contents
77 3) OpenPIC Interrupt Controllers 90 3) OpenPIC Interrupt Controllers
78 4) ISA Interrupt Controllers 91 4) ISA Interrupt Controllers
79 92
80 VIII - Specifying GPIO information for devices 93 IX - Specifying GPIO information for devices
81 1) gpios property 94 1) gpios property
82 2) gpio-controller nodes 95 2) gpio-controller nodes
83 96
97 X - Specifying device power management information (sleep property)
98
84 Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540 99 Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
85 100
86 101
@@ -693,7 +708,7 @@ device or bus to be described by the device tree.
693In general, the format of an address for a device is defined by the 708In general, the format of an address for a device is defined by the
694parent bus type, based on the #address-cells and #size-cells 709parent bus type, based on the #address-cells and #size-cells
695properties. Note that the parent's parent definitions of #address-cells 710properties. Note that the parent's parent definitions of #address-cells
696and #size-cells are not inhereted so every node with children must specify 711and #size-cells are not inherited so every node with children must specify
697them. The kernel requires the root node to have those properties defining 712them. The kernel requires the root node to have those properties defining
698addresses format for devices directly mapped on the processor bus. 713addresses format for devices directly mapped on the processor bus.
699 714
@@ -1762,7 +1777,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
1762 1777
1763 Xilinx uartlite devices are simple fixed speed serial ports. 1778 Xilinx uartlite devices are simple fixed speed serial ports.
1764 1779
1765 Requred properties: 1780 Required properties:
1766 - current-speed : Baud rate of uartlite 1781 - current-speed : Baud rate of uartlite
1767 1782
1768 v) Xilinx hwicap 1783 v) Xilinx hwicap
@@ -1784,7 +1799,7 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
1784 Xilinx UART 16550 devices are very similar to the NS16550 but with 1799 Xilinx UART 16550 devices are very similar to the NS16550 but with
1785 different register spacing and an offset from the base address. 1800 different register spacing and an offset from the base address.
1786 1801
1787 Requred properties: 1802 Required properties:
1788 - clock-frequency : Frequency of the clock input 1803 - clock-frequency : Frequency of the clock input
1789 - reg-offset : A value of 3 is required 1804 - reg-offset : A value of 3 is required
1790 - reg-shift : A value of 2 is required 1805 - reg-shift : A value of 2 is required
@@ -1815,6 +1830,116 @@ platforms are moved over to use the flattened-device-tree model.
1815 big-endian; 1830 big-endian;
1816 }; 1831 };
1817 1832
1833 r) Freescale Display Interface Unit
1834
1835 The Freescale DIU is a LCD controller, with proper hardware, it can also
1836 drive DVI monitors.
1837
1838 Required properties:
1839 - compatible : should be "fsl-diu".
1840 - reg : should contain at least address and length of the DIU register
1841 set.
1842 - Interrupts : one DIU interrupt should be describe here.
1843
1844 Example (MPC8610HPCD)
1845 display@2c000 {
1846 compatible = "fsl,diu";
1847 reg = <0x2c000 100>;
1848 interrupts = <72 2>;
1849 interrupt-parent = <&mpic>;
1850 };
1851
1852 s) Freescale on board FPGA
1853
1854 This is the memory-mapped registers for on board FPGA.
1855
1856 Required properities:
1857 - compatible : should be "fsl,fpga-pixis".
1858 - reg : should contain the address and the lenght of the FPPGA register
1859 set.
1860
1861 Example (MPC8610HPCD)
1862 board-control@e8000000 {
1863 compatible = "fsl,fpga-pixis";
1864 reg = <0xe8000000 32>;
1865 };
1866
1867 r) MDIO on GPIOs
1868
1869 Currently defined compatibles:
1870 - virtual,gpio-mdio
1871
1872 MDC and MDIO lines connected to GPIO controllers are listed in the
1873 gpios property as described in section VIII.1 in the following order:
1874
1875 MDC, MDIO.
1876
1877 Example:
1878
1879 mdio {
1880 compatible = "virtual,mdio-gpio";
1881 #address-cells = <1>;
1882 #size-cells = <0>;
1883 gpios = <&qe_pio_a 11
1884 &qe_pio_c 6>;
1885 };
1886
1887 s) SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) busses
1888
1889 SPI busses can be described with a node for the SPI master device
1890 and a set of child nodes for each SPI slave on the bus. For this
1891 discussion, it is assumed that the system's SPI controller is in
1892 SPI master mode. This binding does not describe SPI controllers
1893 in slave mode.
1894
1895 The SPI master node requires the following properties:
1896 - #address-cells - number of cells required to define a chip select
1897 address on the SPI bus.
1898 - #size-cells - should be zero.
1899 - compatible - name of SPI bus controller following generic names
1900 recommended practice.
1901 No other properties are required in the SPI bus node. It is assumed
1902 that a driver for an SPI bus device will understand that it is an SPI bus.
1903 However, the binding does not attempt to define the specific method for
1904 assigning chip select numbers. Since SPI chip select configuration is
1905 flexible and non-standardized, it is left out of this binding with the
1906 assumption that board specific platform code will be used to manage
1907 chip selects. Individual drivers can define additional properties to
1908 support describing the chip select layout.
1909
1910 SPI slave nodes must be children of the SPI master node and can
1911 contain the following properties.
1912 - reg - (required) chip select address of device.
1913 - compatible - (required) name of SPI device following generic names
1914 recommended practice
1915 - spi-max-frequency - (required) Maximum SPI clocking speed of device in Hz
1916 - spi-cpol - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires
1917 inverse clock polarity (CPOL) mode
1918 - spi-cpha - (optional) Empty property indicating device requires
1919 shifted clock phase (CPHA) mode
1920
1921 SPI example for an MPC5200 SPI bus:
1922 spi@f00 {
1923 #address-cells = <1>;
1924 #size-cells = <0>;
1925 compatible = "fsl,mpc5200b-spi","fsl,mpc5200-spi";
1926 reg = <0xf00 0x20>;
1927 interrupts = <2 13 0 2 14 0>;
1928 interrupt-parent = <&mpc5200_pic>;
1929
1930 ethernet-switch@0 {
1931 compatible = "micrel,ks8995m";
1932 spi-max-frequency = <1000000>;
1933 reg = <0>;
1934 };
1935
1936 codec@1 {
1937 compatible = "ti,tlv320aic26";
1938 spi-max-frequency = <100000>;
1939 reg = <1>;
1940 };
1941 };
1942
1818VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips 1943VII - Marvell Discovery mv64[345]6x System Controller chips
1819=========================================================== 1944===========================================================
1820 1945
@@ -1828,7 +1953,7 @@ prefixed with the string "marvell,", for Marvell Technology Group Ltd.
18281) The /system-controller node 19531) The /system-controller node
1829 1954
1830 This node is used to represent the system-controller and must be 1955 This node is used to represent the system-controller and must be
1831 present when the system uses a system contller chip. The top-level 1956 present when the system uses a system controller chip. The top-level
1832 system-controller node contains information that is global to all 1957 system-controller node contains information that is global to all
1833 devices within the system controller chip. The node name begins 1958 devices within the system controller chip. The node name begins
1834 with "system-controller" followed by the unit address, which is 1959 with "system-controller" followed by the unit address, which is
@@ -2422,8 +2547,8 @@ encodings listed below:
2422 2 = high to low edge sensitive type enabled 2547 2 = high to low edge sensitive type enabled
2423 3 = low to high edge sensitive type enabled 2548 3 = low to high edge sensitive type enabled
2424 2549
2425VIII - Specifying GPIO information for devices 2550IX - Specifying GPIO information for devices
2426============================================== 2551============================================
2427 2552
24281) gpios property 25531) gpios property
2429----------------- 2554-----------------
@@ -2471,116 +2596,151 @@ Example of two SOC GPIO banks defined as gpio-controller nodes:
2471 gpio-controller; 2596 gpio-controller;
2472 }; 2597 };
2473 2598
2599X - Specifying Device Power Management Information (sleep property)
2600===================================================================
2601
2602Devices on SOCs often have mechanisms for placing devices into low-power
2603states that are decoupled from the devices' own register blocks. Sometimes,
2604this information is more complicated than a cell-index property can
2605reasonably describe. Thus, each device controlled in such a manner
2606may contain a "sleep" property which describes these connections.
2607
2608The sleep property consists of one or more sleep resources, each of
2609which consists of a phandle to a sleep controller, followed by a
2610controller-specific sleep specifier of zero or more cells.
2611
2612The semantics of what type of low power modes are possible are defined
2613by the sleep controller. Some examples of the types of low power modes
2614that may be supported are:
2615
2616 - Dynamic: The device may be disabled or enabled at any time.
2617 - System Suspend: The device may request to be disabled or remain
2618 awake during system suspend, but will not be disabled until then.
2619 - Permanent: The device is disabled permanently (until the next hard
2620 reset).
2621
2622Some devices may share a clock domain with each other, such that they should
2623only be suspended when none of the devices are in use. Where reasonable,
2624such nodes should be placed on a virtual bus, where the bus has the sleep
2625property. If the clock domain is shared among devices that cannot be
2626reasonably grouped in this manner, then create a virtual sleep controller
2627(similar to an interrupt nexus, except that defining a standardized
2628sleep-map should wait until its necessity is demonstrated).
2629
2474Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540 2630Appendix A - Sample SOC node for MPC8540
2475======================================== 2631========================================
2476 2632
2477Note that the #address-cells and #size-cells for the SoC node 2633 soc@e0000000 {
2478in this example have been explicitly listed; these are likely
2479not necessary as they are usually the same as the root node.
2480
2481 soc8540@e0000000 {
2482 #address-cells = <1>; 2634 #address-cells = <1>;
2483 #size-cells = <1>; 2635 #size-cells = <1>;
2484 #interrupt-cells = <2>; 2636 compatible = "fsl,mpc8540-ccsr", "simple-bus";
2485 device_type = "soc"; 2637 device_type = "soc";
2486 ranges = <00000000 e0000000 00100000> 2638 ranges = <0x00000000 0xe0000000 0x00100000>
2487 reg = <e0000000 00003000>;
2488 bus-frequency = <0>; 2639 bus-frequency = <0>;
2489 2640 interrupt-parent = <&pic>;
2490 mdio@24520 {
2491 reg = <24520 20>;
2492 device_type = "mdio";
2493 compatible = "gianfar";
2494
2495 ethernet-phy@0 {
2496 linux,phandle = <2452000>
2497 interrupt-parent = <40000>;
2498 interrupts = <35 1>;
2499 reg = <0>;
2500 device_type = "ethernet-phy";
2501 };
2502
2503 ethernet-phy@1 {
2504 linux,phandle = <2452001>
2505 interrupt-parent = <40000>;
2506 interrupts = <35 1>;
2507 reg = <1>;
2508 device_type = "ethernet-phy";
2509 };
2510
2511 ethernet-phy@3 {
2512 linux,phandle = <2452002>
2513 interrupt-parent = <40000>;
2514 interrupts = <35 1>;
2515 reg = <3>;
2516 device_type = "ethernet-phy";
2517 };
2518
2519 };
2520 2641
2521 ethernet@24000 { 2642 ethernet@24000 {
2522 #size-cells = <0>; 2643 #address-cells = <1>;
2644 #size-cells = <1>;
2523 device_type = "network"; 2645 device_type = "network";
2524 model = "TSEC"; 2646 model = "TSEC";
2525 compatible = "gianfar"; 2647 compatible = "gianfar", "simple-bus";
2526 reg = <24000 1000>; 2648 reg = <0x24000 0x1000>;
2527 mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 00 ]; 2649 local-mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 00 ];
2528 interrupts = <d 3 e 3 12 3>; 2650 interrupts = <29 2 30 2 34 2>;
2529 interrupt-parent = <40000>; 2651 phy-handle = <&phy0>;
2530 phy-handle = <2452000>; 2652 sleep = <&pmc 00000080>;
2653 ranges;
2654
2655 mdio@24520 {
2656 reg = <0x24520 0x20>;
2657 compatible = "fsl,gianfar-mdio";
2658
2659 phy0: ethernet-phy@0 {
2660 interrupts = <5 1>;
2661 reg = <0>;
2662 device_type = "ethernet-phy";
2663 };
2664
2665 phy1: ethernet-phy@1 {
2666 interrupts = <5 1>;
2667 reg = <1>;
2668 device_type = "ethernet-phy";
2669 };
2670
2671 phy3: ethernet-phy@3 {
2672 interrupts = <7 1>;
2673 reg = <3>;
2674 device_type = "ethernet-phy";
2675 };
2676 };
2531 }; 2677 };
2532 2678
2533 ethernet@25000 { 2679 ethernet@25000 {
2534 #address-cells = <1>;
2535 #size-cells = <0>;
2536 device_type = "network"; 2680 device_type = "network";
2537 model = "TSEC"; 2681 model = "TSEC";
2538 compatible = "gianfar"; 2682 compatible = "gianfar";
2539 reg = <25000 1000>; 2683 reg = <0x25000 0x1000>;
2540 mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 01 ]; 2684 local-mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 01 ];
2541 interrupts = <13 3 14 3 18 3>; 2685 interrupts = <13 2 14 2 18 2>;
2542 interrupt-parent = <40000>; 2686 phy-handle = <&phy1>;
2543 phy-handle = <2452001>; 2687 sleep = <&pmc 00000040>;
2544 }; 2688 };
2545 2689
2546 ethernet@26000 { 2690 ethernet@26000 {
2547 #address-cells = <1>;
2548 #size-cells = <0>;
2549 device_type = "network"; 2691 device_type = "network";
2550 model = "FEC"; 2692 model = "FEC";
2551 compatible = "gianfar"; 2693 compatible = "gianfar";
2552 reg = <26000 1000>; 2694 reg = <0x26000 0x1000>;
2553 mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 02 ]; 2695 local-mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 02 ];
2554 interrupts = <19 3>; 2696 interrupts = <41 2>;
2555 interrupt-parent = <40000>; 2697 phy-handle = <&phy3>;
2556 phy-handle = <2452002>; 2698 sleep = <&pmc 00000020>;
2557 }; 2699 };
2558 2700
2559 serial@4500 { 2701 serial@4500 {
2560 device_type = "serial"; 2702 #address-cells = <1>;
2561 compatible = "ns16550"; 2703 #size-cells = <1>;
2562 reg = <4500 100>; 2704 compatible = "fsl,mpc8540-duart", "simple-bus";
2563 clock-frequency = <0>; 2705 sleep = <&pmc 00000002>;
2564 interrupts = <1a 3>; 2706 ranges;
2565 interrupt-parent = <40000>; 2707
2708 serial@4500 {
2709 device_type = "serial";
2710 compatible = "ns16550";
2711 reg = <0x4500 0x100>;
2712 clock-frequency = <0>;
2713 interrupts = <42 2>;
2714 };
2715
2716 serial@4600 {
2717 device_type = "serial";
2718 compatible = "ns16550";
2719 reg = <0x4600 0x100>;
2720 clock-frequency = <0>;
2721 interrupts = <42 2>;
2722 };
2566 }; 2723 };
2567 2724
2568 pic@40000 { 2725 pic: pic@40000 {
2569 linux,phandle = <40000>;
2570 interrupt-controller; 2726 interrupt-controller;
2571 #address-cells = <0>; 2727 #address-cells = <0>;
2572 reg = <40000 40000>; 2728 #interrupt-cells = <2>;
2729 reg = <0x40000 0x40000>;
2573 compatible = "chrp,open-pic"; 2730 compatible = "chrp,open-pic";
2574 device_type = "open-pic"; 2731 device_type = "open-pic";
2575 }; 2732 };
2576 2733
2577 i2c@3000 { 2734 i2c@3000 {
2578 interrupt-parent = <40000>; 2735 interrupts = <43 2>;
2579 interrupts = <1b 3>; 2736 reg = <0x3000 0x100>;
2580 reg = <3000 18>;
2581 device_type = "i2c";
2582 compatible = "fsl-i2c"; 2737 compatible = "fsl-i2c";
2583 dfsrr; 2738 dfsrr;
2739 sleep = <&pmc 00000004>;
2584 }; 2740 };
2585 2741
2742 pmc: power@e0070 {
2743 compatible = "fsl,mpc8540-pmc", "fsl,mpc8548-pmc";
2744 reg = <0xe0070 0x20>;
2745 };
2586 }; 2746 };
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1815dfede1bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/gpio.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
1Every GPIO controller node must have #gpio-cells property defined,
2this information will be used to translate gpio-specifiers.
3
4On CPM1 devices, all ports are using slightly different register layouts.
5Ports A, C and D are 16bit ports and Ports B and E are 32bit ports.
6
7On CPM2 devices, all ports are 32bit ports and use a common register layout.
8
9Required properties:
10- compatible : "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-a", "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-b",
11 "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-c", "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-d",
12 "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-e", "fsl,cpm2-pario-bank"
13- #gpio-cells : Should be two. The first cell is the pin number and the
14 second cell is used to specify optional paramters (currently unused).
15- gpio-controller : Marks the port as GPIO controller.
16
17Example of three SOC GPIO banks defined as gpio-controller nodes:
18
19 CPM1_PIO_A: gpio-controller@950 {
20 #gpio-cells = <2>;
21 compatible = "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-a";
22 reg = <0x950 0x10>;
23 gpio-controller;
24 };
25
26 CPM1_PIO_B: gpio-controller@ab8 {
27 #gpio-cells = <2>;
28 compatible = "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-b";
29 reg = <0xab8 0x10>;
30 gpio-controller;
31 };
32
33 CPM1_PIO_E: gpio-controller@ac8 {
34 #gpio-cells = <2>;
35 compatible = "fsl,cpm1-pario-bank-e";
36 reg = <0xac8 0x18>;
37 gpio-controller;
38 };
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt
index c8f44d6bcbcf..9ccd5f30405b 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/cpm_qe/qe/usb.txt
@@ -1,22 +1,37 @@
1* USB (Universal Serial Bus Controller) 1Freescale QUICC Engine USB Controller
2 2
3Required properties: 3Required properties:
4- compatible : could be "qe_udc" or "fhci-hcd". 4- compatible : should be "fsl,<chip>-qe-usb", "fsl,mpc8323-qe-usb".
5- mode : the could be "host" or "slave". 5- reg : the first two cells should contain usb registers location and
6- reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device 6 length, the next two two cells should contain PRAM location and
7- interrupts : <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a 7 length.
8 field that represents an encoding of the sense and level 8- interrupts : should contain USB interrupt.
9 information for the interrupt. This should be encoded based on 9- interrupt-parent : interrupt source phandle.
10 the information in section 2) depending on the type of interrupt 10- fsl,fullspeed-clock : specifies the full speed USB clock source:
11 controller you have. 11 "none": clock source is disabled
12- interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that 12 "brg1" through "brg16": clock source is BRG1-BRG16, respectively
13 services interrupts for this device. 13 "clk1" through "clk24": clock source is CLK1-CLK24, respectively
14- fsl,lowspeed-clock : specifies the low speed USB clock source:
15 "none": clock source is disabled
16 "brg1" through "brg16": clock source is BRG1-BRG16, respectively
17 "clk1" through "clk24": clock source is CLK1-CLK24, respectively
18- hub-power-budget : USB power budget for the root hub, in mA.
19- gpios : should specify GPIOs in this order: USBOE, USBTP, USBTN, USBRP,
20 USBRN, SPEED (optional), and POWER (optional).
14 21
15Example(slave): 22Example:
16 usb@6c0 { 23
17 compatible = "qe_udc"; 24usb@6c0 {
18 reg = <6c0 40>; 25 compatible = "fsl,mpc8360-qe-usb", "fsl,mpc8323-qe-usb";
19 interrupts = <8b 0>; 26 reg = <0x6c0 0x40 0x8b00 0x100>;
20 interrupt-parent = <700>; 27 interrupts = <11>;
21 mode = "slave"; 28 interrupt-parent = <&qeic>;
22 }; 29 fsl,fullspeed-clock = "clk21";
30 gpios = <&qe_pio_b 2 0 /* USBOE */
31 &qe_pio_b 3 0 /* USBTP */
32 &qe_pio_b 8 0 /* USBTN */
33 &qe_pio_b 9 0 /* USBRP */
34 &qe_pio_b 11 0 /* USBRN */
35 &qe_pio_e 20 0 /* SPEED */
36 &qe_pio_e 21 0 /* POWER */>;
37};
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0f766333b6eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/mcu-mpc8349emitx.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
1Freescale MPC8349E-mITX-compatible Power Management Micro Controller Unit (MCU)
2
3Required properties:
4- compatible : "fsl,<mcu-chip>-<board>", "fsl,mcu-mpc8349emitx".
5- reg : should specify I2C address (0x0a).
6- #gpio-cells : should be 2.
7- gpio-controller : should be present.
8
9Example:
10
11mcu@0a {
12 #gpio-cells = <2>;
13 compatible = "fsl,mc9s08qg8-mpc8349emitx",
14 "fsl,mcu-mpc8349emitx";
15 reg = <0x0a>;
16 gpio-controller;
17};
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/pmc.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/pmc.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..02f6f43ee1b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/pmc.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
1* Power Management Controller
2
3Properties:
4- compatible: "fsl,<chip>-pmc".
5
6 "fsl,mpc8349-pmc" should be listed for any chip whose PMC is
7 compatible. "fsl,mpc8313-pmc" should also be listed for any chip
8 whose PMC is compatible, and implies deep-sleep capability.
9
10 "fsl,mpc8548-pmc" should be listed for any chip whose PMC is
11 compatible. "fsl,mpc8536-pmc" should also be listed for any chip
12 whose PMC is compatible, and implies deep-sleep capability.
13
14 "fsl,mpc8641d-pmc" should be listed for any chip whose PMC is
15 compatible; all statements below that apply to "fsl,mpc8548-pmc" also
16 apply to "fsl,mpc8641d-pmc".
17
18 Compatibility does not include bit assigments in SCCR/PMCDR/DEVDISR; these
19 bit assigments are indicated via the sleep specifier in each device's
20 sleep property.
21
22- reg: For devices compatible with "fsl,mpc8349-pmc", the first resource
23 is the PMC block, and the second resource is the Clock Configuration
24 block.
25
26 For devices compatible with "fsl,mpc8548-pmc", the first resource
27 is a 32-byte block beginning with DEVDISR.
28
29- interrupts: For "fsl,mpc8349-pmc"-compatible devices, the first
30 resource is the PMC block interrupt.
31
32- fsl,mpc8313-wakeup-timer: For "fsl,mpc8313-pmc"-compatible devices,
33 this is a phandle to an "fsl,gtm" node on which timer 4 can be used as
34 a wakeup source from deep sleep.
35
36Sleep specifiers:
37
38 fsl,mpc8349-pmc: Sleep specifiers consist of one cell. For each bit
39 that is set in the cell, the corresponding bit in SCCR will be saved
40 and cleared on suspend, and restored on resume. This sleep controller
41 supports disabling and resuming devices at any time.
42
43 fsl,mpc8536-pmc: Sleep specifiers consist of three cells, the third of
44 which will be ORed into PMCDR upon suspend, and cleared from PMCDR
45 upon resume. The first two cells are as described for fsl,mpc8578-pmc.
46 This sleep controller only supports disabling devices during system
47 sleep, or permanently.
48
49 fsl,mpc8548-pmc: Sleep specifiers consist of one or two cells, the
50 first of which will be ORed into DEVDISR (and the second into
51 DEVDISR2, if present -- this cell should be zero or absent if the
52 hardware does not have DEVDISR2) upon a request for permanent device
53 disabling. This sleep controller does not support configuring devices
54 to disable during system sleep (unless supported by another compatible
55 match), or dynamically.
56
57Example:
58
59 power@b00 {
60 compatible = "fsl,mpc8313-pmc", "fsl,mpc8349-pmc";
61 reg = <0xb00 0x100 0xa00 0x100>;
62 interrupts = <80 8>;
63 };
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt
index 583ef6b56c43..cf55fa4112d2 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/tsec.txt
@@ -24,46 +24,39 @@ Example:
24 24
25* Gianfar-compatible ethernet nodes 25* Gianfar-compatible ethernet nodes
26 26
27Required properties: 27Properties:
28 28
29 - device_type : Should be "network" 29 - device_type : Should be "network"
30 - model : Model of the device. Can be "TSEC", "eTSEC", or "FEC" 30 - model : Model of the device. Can be "TSEC", "eTSEC", or "FEC"
31 - compatible : Should be "gianfar" 31 - compatible : Should be "gianfar"
32 - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device 32 - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device
33 - mac-address : List of bytes representing the ethernet address of 33 - local-mac-address : List of bytes representing the ethernet address of
34 this controller 34 this controller
35 - interrupts : <a b> where a is the interrupt number and b is a 35 - interrupts : For FEC devices, the first interrupt is the device's
36 field that represents an encoding of the sense and level 36 interrupt. For TSEC and eTSEC devices, the first interrupt is
37 information for the interrupt. This should be encoded based on 37 transmit, the second is receive, and the third is error.
38 the information in section 2) depending on the type of interrupt
39 controller you have.
40 - interrupt-parent : the phandle for the interrupt controller that
41 services interrupts for this device.
42 - phy-handle : The phandle for the PHY connected to this ethernet 38 - phy-handle : The phandle for the PHY connected to this ethernet
43 controller. 39 controller.
44 - fixed-link : <a b c d e> where a is emulated phy id - choose any, 40 - fixed-link : <a b c d e> where a is emulated phy id - choose any,
45 but unique to the all specified fixed-links, b is duplex - 0 half, 41 but unique to the all specified fixed-links, b is duplex - 0 half,
46 1 full, c is link speed - d#10/d#100/d#1000, d is pause - 0 no 42 1 full, c is link speed - d#10/d#100/d#1000, d is pause - 0 no
47 pause, 1 pause, e is asym_pause - 0 no asym_pause, 1 asym_pause. 43 pause, 1 pause, e is asym_pause - 0 no asym_pause, 1 asym_pause.
48
49Recommended properties:
50
51 - phy-connection-type : a string naming the controller/PHY interface type, 44 - phy-connection-type : a string naming the controller/PHY interface type,
52 i.e., "mii" (default), "rmii", "gmii", "rgmii", "rgmii-id", "sgmii", 45 i.e., "mii" (default), "rmii", "gmii", "rgmii", "rgmii-id", "sgmii",
53 "tbi", or "rtbi". This property is only really needed if the connection 46 "tbi", or "rtbi". This property is only really needed if the connection
54 is of type "rgmii-id", as all other connection types are detected by 47 is of type "rgmii-id", as all other connection types are detected by
55 hardware. 48 hardware.
56 49 - fsl,magic-packet : If present, indicates that the hardware supports
50 waking up via magic packet.
57 51
58Example: 52Example:
59 ethernet@24000 { 53 ethernet@24000 {
60 #size-cells = <0>;
61 device_type = "network"; 54 device_type = "network";
62 model = "TSEC"; 55 model = "TSEC";
63 compatible = "gianfar"; 56 compatible = "gianfar";
64 reg = <24000 1000>; 57 reg = <0x24000 0x1000>;
65 mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 00 ]; 58 local-mac-address = [ 00 E0 0C 00 73 00 ];
66 interrupts = <d 3 e 3 12 3>; 59 interrupts = <29 2 30 2 34 2>;
67 interrupt-parent = <40000>; 60 interrupt-parent = <&mpic>;
68 phy-handle = <2452000> 61 phy-handle = <&phy0>
69 }; 62 };
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/upm-nand.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/upm-nand.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..84a04d5eb8e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/fsl/upm-nand.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
1Freescale Localbus UPM programmed to work with NAND flash
2
3Required properties:
4- compatible : "fsl,upm-nand".
5- reg : should specify localbus chip select and size used for the chip.
6- fsl,upm-addr-offset : UPM pattern offset for the address latch.
7- fsl,upm-cmd-offset : UPM pattern offset for the command latch.
8- gpios : may specify optional GPIO connected to the Ready-Not-Busy pin.
9
10Example:
11
12upm@1,0 {
13 compatible = "fsl,upm-nand";
14 reg = <1 0 1>;
15 fsl,upm-addr-offset = <16>;
16 fsl,upm-cmd-offset = <8>;
17 gpios = <&qe_pio_e 18 0>;
18
19 flash {
20 #address-cells = <1>;
21 #size-cells = <1>;
22 compatible = "...";
23
24 partition@0 {
25 ...
26 };
27 };
28};
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/led.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/led.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ff51f4c0fa9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/dts-bindings/gpio/led.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
1LED connected to GPIO
2
3Required properties:
4- compatible : should be "gpio-led".
5- label : (optional) the label for this LED. If omitted, the label is
6 taken from the node name (excluding the unit address).
7- gpios : should specify LED GPIO.
8
9Example:
10
11led@0 {
12 compatible = "gpio-led";
13 label = "hdd";
14 gpios = <&mcu_pio 0 1>;
15};
diff --git a/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt b/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt
index 896266432d33..06da4d4b44f9 100644
--- a/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt
+++ b/Documentation/powerpc/qe_firmware.txt
@@ -217,7 +217,7 @@ Although it is not recommended, you can specify '0' in the soc.model
217field to skip matching SOCs altogether. 217field to skip matching SOCs altogether.
218 218
219The 'model' field is a 16-bit number that matches the actual SOC. The 219The 'model' field is a 16-bit number that matches the actual SOC. The
220'major' and 'minor' fields are the major and minor revision numbrs, 220'major' and 'minor' fields are the major and minor revision numbers,
221respectively, of the SOC. 221respectively, of the SOC.
222 222
223For example, to match the 8323, revision 1.0: 223For example, to match the 8323, revision 1.0:
diff --git a/Documentation/rfkill.txt b/Documentation/rfkill.txt
index a83ff23cd68c..0843ed0163a5 100644
--- a/Documentation/rfkill.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rfkill.txt
@@ -1,89 +1,528 @@
1rfkill - RF switch subsystem support 1rfkill - RF switch subsystem support
2==================================== 2====================================
3 3
41 Implementation details 41 Introduction
52 Driver support 52 Implementation details
63 Userspace support 63 Kernel driver guidelines
73.1 wireless device drivers
83.2 platform/switch drivers
93.3 input device drivers
104 Kernel API
115 Userspace support
7 12
8===============================================================================
91: Implementation details
10 13
11The rfkill switch subsystem offers support for keys often found on laptops 141. Introduction:
12to enable wireless devices like WiFi and Bluetooth. 15
16The rfkill switch subsystem exists to add a generic interface to circuitry that
17can enable or disable the signal output of a wireless *transmitter* of any
18type. By far, the most common use is to disable radio-frequency transmitters.
13 19
14This is done by providing the user 3 possibilities: 20Note that disabling the signal output means that the the transmitter is to be
15 1 - The rfkill system handles all events; userspace is not aware of events. 21made to not emit any energy when "blocked". rfkill is not about blocking data
16 2 - The rfkill system handles all events; userspace is informed about the events. 22transmissions, it is about blocking energy emission.
17 3 - The rfkill system does not handle events; userspace handles all events.
18 23
19The buttons to enable and disable the wireless radios are important in 24The rfkill subsystem offers support for keys and switches often found on
25laptops to enable wireless devices like WiFi and Bluetooth, so that these keys
26and switches actually perform an action in all wireless devices of a given type
27attached to the system.
28
29The buttons to enable and disable the wireless transmitters are important in
20situations where the user is for example using his laptop on a location where 30situations where the user is for example using his laptop on a location where
21wireless radios _must_ be disabled (e.g. airplanes). 31radio-frequency transmitters _must_ be disabled (e.g. airplanes).
22Because of this requirement, userspace support for the keys should not be 32
23made mandatory. Because userspace might want to perform some additional smarter 33Because of this requirement, userspace support for the keys should not be made
24tasks when the key is pressed, rfkill still provides userspace the possibility 34mandatory. Because userspace might want to perform some additional smarter
25to take over the task to handle the key events. 35tasks when the key is pressed, rfkill provides userspace the possibility to
36take over the task to handle the key events.
37
38===============================================================================
392: Implementation details
40
41The rfkill subsystem is composed of various components: the rfkill class, the
42rfkill-input module (an input layer handler), and some specific input layer
43events.
44
45The rfkill class provides kernel drivers with an interface that allows them to
46know when they should enable or disable a wireless network device transmitter.
47This is enabled by the CONFIG_RFKILL Kconfig option.
48
49The rfkill class support makes sure userspace will be notified of all state
50changes on rfkill devices through uevents. It provides a notification chain
51for interested parties in the kernel to also get notified of rfkill state
52changes in other drivers. It creates several sysfs entries which can be used
53by userspace. See section "Userspace support".
54
55The rfkill-input module provides the kernel with the ability to implement a
56basic response when the user presses a key or button (or toggles a switch)
57related to rfkill functionality. It is an in-kernel implementation of default
58policy of reacting to rfkill-related input events and neither mandatory nor
59required for wireless drivers to operate. It is enabled by the
60CONFIG_RFKILL_INPUT Kconfig option.
61
62rfkill-input is a rfkill-related events input layer handler. This handler will
63listen to all rfkill key events and will change the rfkill state of the
64wireless devices accordingly. With this option enabled userspace could either
65do nothing or simply perform monitoring tasks.
66
67The rfkill-input module also provides EPO (emergency power-off) functionality
68for all wireless transmitters. This function cannot be overridden, and it is
69always active. rfkill EPO is related to *_RFKILL_ALL input layer events.
70
71
72Important terms for the rfkill subsystem:
73
74In order to avoid confusion, we avoid the term "switch" in rfkill when it is
75referring to an electronic control circuit that enables or disables a
76transmitter. We reserve it for the physical device a human manipulates
77(which is an input device, by the way):
78
79rfkill switch:
80
81 A physical device a human manipulates. Its state can be perceived by
82 the kernel either directly (through a GPIO pin, ACPI GPE) or by its
83 effect on a rfkill line of a wireless device.
84
85rfkill controller:
86
87 A hardware circuit that controls the state of a rfkill line, which a
88 kernel driver can interact with *to modify* that state (i.e. it has
89 either write-only or read/write access).
90
91rfkill line:
92
93 An input channel (hardware or software) of a wireless device, which
94 causes a wireless transmitter to stop emitting energy (BLOCK) when it
95 is active. Point of view is extremely important here: rfkill lines are
96 always seen from the PoV of a wireless device (and its driver).
97
98soft rfkill line/software rfkill line:
99
100 A rfkill line the wireless device driver can directly change the state
101 of. Related to rfkill_state RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED.
102
103hard rfkill line/hardware rfkill line:
104
105 A rfkill line that works fully in hardware or firmware, and that cannot
106 be overridden by the kernel driver. The hardware device or the
107 firmware just exports its status to the driver, but it is read-only.
108 Related to rfkill_state RFKILL_STATE_HARD_BLOCKED.
109
110The enum rfkill_state describes the rfkill state of a transmitter:
111
112When a rfkill line or rfkill controller is in the RFKILL_STATE_UNBLOCKED state,
113the wireless transmitter (radio TX circuit for example) is *enabled*. When the
114it is in the RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED or RFKILL_STATE_HARD_BLOCKED, the
115wireless transmitter is to be *blocked* from operating.
116
117RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED indicates that a call to toggle_radio() can change
118that state. RFKILL_STATE_HARD_BLOCKED indicates that a call to toggle_radio()
119will not be able to change the state and will return with a suitable error if
120attempts are made to set the state to RFKILL_STATE_UNBLOCKED.
121
122RFKILL_STATE_HARD_BLOCKED is used by drivers to signal that the device is
123locked in the BLOCKED state by a hardwire rfkill line (typically an input pin
124that, when active, forces the transmitter to be disabled) which the driver
125CANNOT override.
126
127Full rfkill functionality requires two different subsystems to cooperate: the
128input layer and the rfkill class. The input layer issues *commands* to the
129entire system requesting that devices registered to the rfkill class change
130state. The way this interaction happens is not complex, but it is not obvious
131either:
132
133Kernel Input layer:
134
135 * Generates KEY_WWAN, KEY_WLAN, KEY_BLUETOOTH, SW_RFKILL_ALL, and
136 other such events when the user presses certain keys, buttons, or
137 toggles certain physical switches.
138
139 THE INPUT LAYER IS NEVER USED TO PROPAGATE STATUS, NOTIFICATIONS OR THE
140 KIND OF STUFF AN ON-SCREEN-DISPLAY APPLICATION WOULD REPORT. It is
141 used to issue *commands* for the system to change behaviour, and these
142 commands may or may not be carried out by some kernel driver or
143 userspace application. It follows that doing user feedback based only
144 on input events is broken, as there is no guarantee that an input event
145 will be acted upon.
146
147 Most wireless communication device drivers implementing rfkill
148 functionality MUST NOT generate these events, and have no reason to
149 register themselves with the input layer. Doing otherwise is a common
150 misconception. There is an API to propagate rfkill status change
151 information, and it is NOT the input layer.
152
153rfkill class:
154
155 * Calls a hook in a driver to effectively change the wireless
156 transmitter state;
157 * Keeps track of the wireless transmitter state (with help from
158 the driver);
159 * Generates userspace notifications (uevents) and a call to a
160 notification chain (kernel) when there is a wireless transmitter
161 state change;
162 * Connects a wireless communications driver with the common rfkill
163 control system, which, for example, allows actions such as
164 "switch all bluetooth devices offline" to be carried out by
165 userspace or by rfkill-input.
166
167 THE RFKILL CLASS NEVER ISSUES INPUT EVENTS. THE RFKILL CLASS DOES
168 NOT LISTEN TO INPUT EVENTS. NO DRIVER USING THE RFKILL CLASS SHALL
169 EVER LISTEN TO, OR ACT ON RFKILL INPUT EVENTS. Doing otherwise is
170 a layering violation.
171
172 Most wireless data communication drivers in the kernel have just to
173 implement the rfkill class API to work properly. Interfacing to the
174 input layer is not often required (and is very often a *bug*) on
175 wireless drivers.
176
177 Platform drivers often have to attach to the input layer to *issue*
178 (but never to listen to) rfkill events for rfkill switches, and also to
179 the rfkill class to export a control interface for the platform rfkill
180 controllers to the rfkill subsystem. This does NOT mean the rfkill
181 switch is attached to a rfkill class (doing so is almost always wrong).
182 It just means the same kernel module is the driver for different
183 devices (rfkill switches and rfkill controllers).
184
185
186Userspace input handlers (uevents) or kernel input handlers (rfkill-input):
187
188 * Implements the policy of what should happen when one of the input
189 layer events related to rfkill operation is received.
190 * Uses the sysfs interface (userspace) or private rfkill API calls
191 to tell the devices registered with the rfkill class to change
192 their state (i.e. translates the input layer event into real
193 action).
194 * rfkill-input implements EPO by handling EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL 0
195 (power off all transmitters) in a special way: it ignores any
196 overrides and local state cache and forces all transmitters to the
197 RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED state (including those which are already
198 supposed to be BLOCKED). Note that the opposite event (power on all
199 transmitters) is handled normally.
200
201Userspace uevent handler or kernel platform-specific drivers hooked to the
202rfkill notifier chain:
203
204 * Taps into the rfkill notifier chain or to KOBJ_CHANGE uevents,
205 in order to know when a device that is registered with the rfkill
206 class changes state;
207 * Issues feedback notifications to the user;
208 * In the rare platforms where this is required, synthesizes an input
209 event to command all *OTHER* rfkill devices to also change their
210 statues when a specific rfkill device changes state.
211
212
213===============================================================================
2143: Kernel driver guidelines
215
216Remember: point-of-view is everything for a driver that connects to the rfkill
217subsystem. All the details below must be measured/perceived from the point of
218view of the specific driver being modified.
219
220The first thing one needs to know is whether his driver should be talking to
221the rfkill class or to the input layer. In rare cases (platform drivers), it
222could happen that you need to do both, as platform drivers often handle a
223variety of devices in the same driver.
224
225Do not mistake input devices for rfkill controllers. The only type of "rfkill
226switch" device that is to be registered with the rfkill class are those
227directly controlling the circuits that cause a wireless transmitter to stop
228working (or the software equivalent of them), i.e. what we call a rfkill
229controller. Every other kind of "rfkill switch" is just an input device and
230MUST NOT be registered with the rfkill class.
231
232A driver should register a device with the rfkill class when ALL of the
233following conditions are met (they define a rfkill controller):
234
2351. The device is/controls a data communications wireless transmitter;
236
2372. The kernel can interact with the hardware/firmware to CHANGE the wireless
238 transmitter state (block/unblock TX operation);
239
2403. The transmitter can be made to not emit any energy when "blocked":
241 rfkill is not about blocking data transmissions, it is about blocking
242 energy emission;
243
244A driver should register a device with the input subsystem to issue
245rfkill-related events (KEY_WLAN, KEY_BLUETOOTH, KEY_WWAN, KEY_WIMAX,
246SW_RFKILL_ALL, etc) when ALL of the folowing conditions are met:
247
2481. It is directly related to some physical device the user interacts with, to
249 command the O.S./firmware/hardware to enable/disable a data communications
250 wireless transmitter.
251
252 Examples of the physical device are: buttons, keys and switches the user
253 will press/touch/slide/switch to enable or disable the wireless
254 communication device.
255
2562. It is NOT slaved to another device, i.e. there is no other device that
257 issues rfkill-related input events in preference to this one.
26 258
27The system inside the kernel has been split into 2 separate sections: 259 Please refer to the corner cases and examples section for more details.
28 1 - RFKILL
29 2 - RFKILL_INPUT
30 260
31The first option enables rfkill support and will make sure userspace will 261When in doubt, do not issue input events. For drivers that should generate
32be notified of any events through the input device. It also creates several 262input events in some platforms, but not in others (e.g. b43), the best solution
33sysfs entries which can be used by userspace. See section "Userspace support". 263is to NEVER generate input events in the first place. That work should be
264deferred to a platform-specific kernel module (which will know when to generate
265events through the rfkill notifier chain) or to userspace. This avoids the
266usual maintenance problems with DMI whitelisting.
34 267
35The second option provides an rfkill input handler. This handler will
36listen to all rfkill key events and will toggle the radio accordingly.
37With this option enabled userspace could either do nothing or simply
38perform monitoring tasks.
39 268
269Corner cases and examples:
40==================================== 270====================================
412: Driver support
42 271
43To build a driver with rfkill subsystem support, the driver should 2721. If the device is an input device that, because of hardware or firmware,
44depend on the Kconfig symbol RFKILL; it should _not_ depend on 273causes wireless transmitters to be blocked regardless of the kernel's will, it
45RKFILL_INPUT. 274is still just an input device, and NOT to be registered with the rfkill class.
46 275
47Unless key events trigger an interrupt to which the driver listens, polling 2762. If the wireless transmitter switch control is read-only, it is an input
48will be required to determine the key state changes. For this the input 277device and not to be registered with the rfkill class (and maybe not to be made
49layer providers the input-polldev handler. 278an input layer event source either, see below).
50 279
51A driver should implement a few steps to correctly make use of the 2803. If there is some other device driver *closer* to the actual hardware the
52rfkill subsystem. First for non-polling drivers: 281user interacted with (the button/switch/key) to issue an input event, THAT is
282the device driver that should be issuing input events.
53 283
54 - rfkill_allocate() 284E.g:
55 - input_allocate_device() 285 [RFKILL slider switch] -- [GPIO hardware] -- [WLAN card rf-kill input]
56 - rfkill_register() 286 (platform driver) (wireless card driver)
57 - input_register_device() 287
288The user is closer to the RFKILL slide switch plaform driver, so the driver
289which must issue input events is the platform driver looking at the GPIO
290hardware, and NEVER the wireless card driver (which is just a slave). It is
291very likely that there are other leaves than just the WLAN card rf-kill input
292(e.g. a bluetooth card, etc)...
293
294On the other hand, some embedded devices do this:
295
296 [RFKILL slider switch] -- [WLAN card rf-kill input]
297 (wireless card driver)
298
299In this situation, the wireless card driver *could* register itself as an input
300device and issue rf-kill related input events... but in order to AVOID the need
301for DMI whitelisting, the wireless card driver does NOT do it. Userspace (HAL)
302or a platform driver (that exists only on these embedded devices) will do the
303dirty job of issuing the input events.
304
305
306COMMON MISTAKES in kernel drivers, related to rfkill:
307====================================
308
3091. NEVER confuse input device keys and buttons with input device switches.
310
311 1a. Switches are always set or reset. They report the current state
312 (on position or off position).
313
314 1b. Keys and buttons are either in the pressed or not-pressed state, and
315 that's it. A "button" that latches down when you press it, and
316 unlatches when you press it again is in fact a switch as far as input
317 devices go.
318
319Add the SW_* events you need for switches, do NOT try to emulate a button using
320KEY_* events just because there is no such SW_* event yet. Do NOT try to use,
321for example, KEY_BLUETOOTH when you should be using SW_BLUETOOTH instead.
322
3232. Input device switches (sources of EV_SW events) DO store their current state
324(so you *must* initialize it by issuing a gratuitous input layer event on
325driver start-up and also when resuming from sleep), and that state CAN be
326queried from userspace through IOCTLs. There is no sysfs interface for this,
327but that doesn't mean you should break things trying to hook it to the rfkill
328class to get a sysfs interface :-)
329
3303. Do not issue *_RFKILL_ALL events by default, unless you are sure it is the
331correct event for your switch/button. These events are emergency power-off
332events when they are trying to turn the transmitters off. An example of an
333input device which SHOULD generate *_RFKILL_ALL events is the wireless-kill
334switch in a laptop which is NOT a hotkey, but a real switch that kills radios
335in hardware, even if the O.S. has gone to lunch. An example of an input device
336which SHOULD NOT generate *_RFKILL_ALL events by default, is any sort of hot
337key that does nothing by itself, as well as any hot key that is type-specific
338(e.g. the one for WLAN).
339
340
3413.1 Guidelines for wireless device drivers
342------------------------------------------
343
3441. Each independent transmitter in a wireless device (usually there is only one
345transmitter per device) should have a SINGLE rfkill class attached to it.
346
3472. If the device does not have any sort of hardware assistance to allow the
348driver to rfkill the device, the driver should emulate it by taking all actions
349required to silence the transmitter.
350
3513. If it is impossible to silence the transmitter (i.e. it still emits energy,
352even if it is just in brief pulses, when there is no data to transmit and there
353is no hardware support to turn it off) do NOT lie to the users. Do not attach
354it to a rfkill class. The rfkill subsystem does not deal with data
355transmission, it deals with energy emission. If the transmitter is emitting
356energy, it is not blocked in rfkill terms.
357
3584. It doesn't matter if the device has multiple rfkill input lines affecting
359the same transmitter, their combined state is to be exported as a single state
360per transmitter (see rule 1).
361
362This rule exists because users of the rfkill subsystem expect to get (and set,
363when possible) the overall transmitter rfkill state, not of a particular rfkill
364line.
365
366Example of a WLAN wireless driver connected to the rfkill subsystem:
367--------------------------------------------------------------------
368
369A certain WLAN card has one input pin that causes it to block the transmitter
370and makes the status of that input pin available (only for reading!) to the
371kernel driver. This is a hard rfkill input line (it cannot be overridden by
372the kernel driver).
373
374The card also has one PCI register that, if manipulated by the driver, causes
375it to block the transmitter. This is a soft rfkill input line.
376
377It has also a thermal protection circuitry that shuts down its transmitter if
378the card overheats, and makes the status of that protection available (only for
379reading!) to the kernel driver. This is also a hard rfkill input line.
380
381If either one of these rfkill lines are active, the transmitter is blocked by
382the hardware and forced offline.
383
384The driver should allocate and attach to its struct device *ONE* instance of
385the rfkill class (there is only one transmitter).
386
387It can implement the get_state() hook, and return RFKILL_STATE_HARD_BLOCKED if
388either one of its two hard rfkill input lines are active. If the two hard
389rfkill lines are inactive, it must return RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED if its soft
390rfkill input line is active. Only if none of the rfkill input lines are
391active, will it return RFKILL_STATE_UNBLOCKED.
58 392
59For polling drivers: 393If it doesn't implement the get_state() hook, it must make sure that its calls
394to rfkill_force_state() are enough to keep the status always up-to-date, and it
395must do a rfkill_force_state() on resume from sleep.
60 396
397Every time the driver gets a notification from the card that one of its rfkill
398lines changed state (polling might be needed on badly designed cards that don't
399generate interrupts for such events), it recomputes the rfkill state as per
400above, and calls rfkill_force_state() to update it.
401
402The driver should implement the toggle_radio() hook, that:
403
4041. Returns an error if one of the hardware rfkill lines are active, and the
405caller asked for RFKILL_STATE_UNBLOCKED.
406
4072. Activates the soft rfkill line if the caller asked for state
408RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED. It should do this even if one of the hard rfkill
409lines are active, effectively double-blocking the transmitter.
410
4113. Deactivates the soft rfkill line if none of the hardware rfkill lines are
412active and the caller asked for RFKILL_STATE_UNBLOCKED.
413
414===============================================================================
4154: Kernel API
416
417To build a driver with rfkill subsystem support, the driver should depend on
418(or select) the Kconfig symbol RFKILL; it should _not_ depend on RKFILL_INPUT.
419
420The hardware the driver talks to may be write-only (where the current state
421of the hardware is unknown), or read-write (where the hardware can be queried
422about its current state).
423
424The rfkill class will call the get_state hook of a device every time it needs
425to know the *real* current state of the hardware. This can happen often.
426
427Some hardware provides events when its status changes. In these cases, it is
428best for the driver to not provide a get_state hook, and instead register the
429rfkill class *already* with the correct status, and keep it updated using
430rfkill_force_state() when it gets an event from the hardware.
431
432There is no provision for a statically-allocated rfkill struct. You must
433use rfkill_allocate() to allocate one.
434
435You should:
61 - rfkill_allocate() 436 - rfkill_allocate()
62 - input_allocate_polled_device() 437 - modify rfkill fields (flags, name)
438 - modify state to the current hardware state (THIS IS THE ONLY TIME
439 YOU CAN ACCESS state DIRECTLY)
63 - rfkill_register() 440 - rfkill_register()
64 - input_register_polled_device()
65 441
66When a key event has been detected, the correct event should be 442The only way to set a device to the RFKILL_STATE_HARD_BLOCKED state is through
67sent over the input device which has been registered by the driver. 443a suitable return of get_state() or through rfkill_force_state().
68 444
69==================================== 445When a device is in the RFKILL_STATE_HARD_BLOCKED state, the only way to switch
703: Userspace support 446it to a different state is through a suitable return of get_state() or through
447rfkill_force_state().
448
449If toggle_radio() is called to set a device to state RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED
450when that device is already at the RFKILL_STATE_HARD_BLOCKED state, it should
451not return an error. Instead, it should try to double-block the transmitter,
452so that its state will change from RFKILL_STATE_HARD_BLOCKED to
453RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED should the hardware blocking cease.
71 454
72For each key an input device will be created which will send out the correct 455Please refer to the source for more documentation.
73key event when the rfkill key has been pressed. 456
457===============================================================================
4585: Userspace support
459
460rfkill devices issue uevents (with an action of "change"), with the following
461environment variables set:
462
463RFKILL_NAME
464RFKILL_STATE
465RFKILL_TYPE
466
467The ABI for these variables is defined by the sysfs attributes. It is best
468to take a quick look at the source to make sure of the possible values.
469
470It is expected that HAL will trap those, and bridge them to DBUS, etc. These
471events CAN and SHOULD be used to give feedback to the user about the rfkill
472status of the system.
473
474Input devices may issue events that are related to rfkill. These are the
475various KEY_* events and SW_* events supported by rfkill-input.c.
476
477******IMPORTANT******
478When rfkill-input is ACTIVE, userspace is NOT TO CHANGE THE STATE OF AN RFKILL
479SWITCH IN RESPONSE TO AN INPUT EVENT also handled by rfkill-input, unless it
480has set to true the user_claim attribute for that particular switch. This rule
481is *absolute*; do NOT violate it.
482******IMPORTANT******
483
484Userspace must not assume it is the only source of control for rfkill switches.
485Their state CAN and WILL change due to firmware actions, direct user actions,
486and the rfkill-input EPO override for *_RFKILL_ALL.
487
488When rfkill-input is not active, userspace must initiate a rfkill status
489change by writing to the "state" attribute in order for anything to happen.
490
491Take particular care to implement EV_SW SW_RFKILL_ALL properly. When that
492switch is set to OFF, *every* rfkill device *MUST* be immediately put into the
493RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED state, no questions asked.
74 494
75The following sysfs entries will be created: 495The following sysfs entries will be created:
76 496
77 name: Name assigned by driver to this key (interface or driver name). 497 name: Name assigned by driver to this key (interface or driver name).
78 type: Name of the key type ("wlan", "bluetooth", etc). 498 type: Name of the key type ("wlan", "bluetooth", etc).
79 state: Current state of the key. 1: On, 0: Off. 499 state: Current state of the transmitter
500 0: RFKILL_STATE_SOFT_BLOCKED
501 transmitter is forced off, but one can override it
502 by a write to the state attribute;
503 1: RFKILL_STATE_UNBLOCKED
504 transmiter is NOT forced off, and may operate if
505 all other conditions for such operation are met
506 (such as interface is up and configured, etc);
507 2: RFKILL_STATE_HARD_BLOCKED
508 transmitter is forced off by something outside of
509 the driver's control. One cannot set a device to
510 this state through writes to the state attribute;
80 claim: 1: Userspace handles events, 0: Kernel handles events 511 claim: 1: Userspace handles events, 0: Kernel handles events
81 512
82Both the "state" and "claim" entries are also writable. For the "state" entry 513Both the "state" and "claim" entries are also writable. For the "state" entry
83this means that when 1 or 0 is written all radios, not yet in the requested 514this means that when 1 or 0 is written, the device rfkill state (if not yet in
84state, will be will be toggled accordingly. 515the requested state), will be will be toggled accordingly.
516
85For the "claim" entry writing 1 to it means that the kernel no longer handles 517For the "claim" entry writing 1 to it means that the kernel no longer handles
86key events even though RFKILL_INPUT input was enabled. When "claim" has been 518key events even though RFKILL_INPUT input was enabled. When "claim" has been
87set to 0, userspace should make sure that it listens for the input events or 519set to 0, userspace should make sure that it listens for the input events or
88check the sysfs "state" entry regularly to correctly perform the required 520check the sysfs "state" entry regularly to correctly perform the required tasks
89tasks when the rkfill key is pressed. 521when the rkfill key is pressed.
522
523A note about input devices and EV_SW events:
524
525In order to know the current state of an input device switch (like
526SW_RFKILL_ALL), you will need to use an IOCTL. That information is not
527available through sysfs in a generic way at this time, and it is not available
528through the rfkill class AT ALL.
diff --git a/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt b/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt
index e938c442277d..bde473df748d 100644
--- a/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt
+++ b/Documentation/s390/driver-model.txt
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ device 4711 via subchannel 1 in subchannel set 0, and subchannel 2 is a non-I/O
25subchannel. Device 1234 is accessed via subchannel 0 in subchannel set 1. 25subchannel. Device 1234 is accessed via subchannel 0 in subchannel set 1.
26 26
27The subchannel named 'defunct' does not represent any real subchannel on the 27The subchannel named 'defunct' does not represent any real subchannel on the
28system; it is a pseudo subchannel where disconnnected ccw devices are moved to 28system; it is a pseudo subchannel where disconnected ccw devices are moved to
29if they are displaced by another ccw device becoming operational on their 29if they are displaced by another ccw device becoming operational on their
30former subchannel. The ccw devices will be moved again to a proper subchannel 30former subchannel. The ccw devices will be moved again to a proper subchannel
31if they become operational again on that subchannel. 31if they become operational again on that subchannel.
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt
index a810421f1fb3..3920f28710c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/ibmmca.txt
@@ -524,7 +524,7 @@
524 - Michael Lang 524 - Michael Lang
525 525
526 June 25 1997: (v1.8b) 526 June 25 1997: (v1.8b)
527 1) Some cosmetical changes for the handling of SCSI-device-types. 527 1) Some cosmetic changes for the handling of SCSI-device-types.
528 Now, also CD-Burners / WORMs and SCSI-scanners should work. For 528 Now, also CD-Burners / WORMs and SCSI-scanners should work. For
529 MO-drives I have no experience, therefore not yet supported. 529 MO-drives I have no experience, therefore not yet supported.
530 In logical_devices I changed from different type-variables to one 530 In logical_devices I changed from different type-variables to one
@@ -914,7 +914,7 @@
914 in version 4.0. This was never really necessary, as all troubles were 914 in version 4.0. This was never really necessary, as all troubles were
915 based on non-command related reasons up to now, so bypassing commands 915 based on non-command related reasons up to now, so bypassing commands
916 did not help to avoid any bugs. It is kept in 3.2X for debugging reasons. 916 did not help to avoid any bugs. It is kept in 3.2X for debugging reasons.
917 5) Dynamical reassignment of ldns was again verified and analyzed to be 917 5) Dynamic reassignment of ldns was again verified and analyzed to be
918 completely inoperational. This is corrected and should work now. 918 completely inoperational. This is corrected and should work now.
919 6) All commands that get sent to the SCSI adapter were verified and 919 6) All commands that get sent to the SCSI adapter were verified and
920 completed in such a way, that they are now completely conform to the 920 completed in such a way, that they are now completely conform to the
@@ -1386,7 +1386,7 @@
1386 concerning the Linux-kernel in special, this SCSI-driver comes without any 1386 concerning the Linux-kernel in special, this SCSI-driver comes without any
1387 warranty. Its functionality is tested as good as possible on certain 1387 warranty. Its functionality is tested as good as possible on certain
1388 machines and combinations of computer hardware, which does not exclude, 1388 machines and combinations of computer hardware, which does not exclude,
1389 that dataloss or severe damage of hardware is possible while using this 1389 that data loss or severe damage of hardware is possible while using this
1390 part of software on some arbitrary computer hardware or in combination 1390 part of software on some arbitrary computer hardware or in combination
1391 with other software packages. It is highly recommended to make backup 1391 with other software packages. It is highly recommended to make backup
1392 copies of your data before using this software. Furthermore, personal 1392 copies of your data before using this software. Furthermore, personal
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt b/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt
index 4dbe41370a6d..5741ea8aa88a 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/lpfc.txt
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Cable pull and temporary device Loss:
36 being removed, a switch rebooting, or a device reboot), the driver could 36 being removed, a switch rebooting, or a device reboot), the driver could
37 hide the disappearance of the device from the midlayer. I/O's issued to 37 hide the disappearance of the device from the midlayer. I/O's issued to
38 the LLDD would simply be queued for a short duration, allowing the device 38 the LLDD would simply be queued for a short duration, allowing the device
39 to reappear or link come back alive, with no inadvertant side effects 39 to reappear or link come back alive, with no inadvertent side effects
40 to the system. If the driver did not hide these conditions, i/o would be 40 to the system. If the driver did not hide these conditions, i/o would be
41 errored by the driver, the mid-layer would exhaust its retries, and the 41 errored by the driver, the mid-layer would exhaust its retries, and the
42 device would be taken offline. Manual intervention would be required to 42 device would be taken offline. Manual intervention would be required to
diff --git a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
index d403e46d8463..75143f0c23b6 100644
--- a/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
+++ b/Documentation/scsi/scsi_fc_transport.txt
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Overview:
65 discussion will concentrate on NPIV. 65 discussion will concentrate on NPIV.
66 66
67 Note: World Wide Name assignment (and uniqueness guarantees) are left 67 Note: World Wide Name assignment (and uniqueness guarantees) are left
68 up to an administrative entity controling the vport. For example, 68 up to an administrative entity controlling the vport. For example,
69 if vports are to be associated with virtual machines, a XEN mgmt 69 if vports are to be associated with virtual machines, a XEN mgmt
70 utility would be responsible for creating wwpn/wwnn's for the vport, 70 utility would be responsible for creating wwpn/wwnn's for the vport,
71 using it's own naming authority and OUI. (Note: it already does this 71 using it's own naming authority and OUI. (Note: it already does this
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Device Trees and Vport Objects:
91 Here's what to expect in the device tree : 91 Here's what to expect in the device tree :
92 The typical Physical Port's Scsi_Host: 92 The typical Physical Port's Scsi_Host:
93 /sys/devices/.../host17/ 93 /sys/devices/.../host17/
94 and it has the typical decendent tree: 94 and it has the typical descendant tree:
95 /sys/devices/.../host17/rport-17:0-0/target17:0:0/17:0:0:0: 95 /sys/devices/.../host17/rport-17:0-0/target17:0:0/17:0:0:0:
96 and then the vport is created on the Physical Port: 96 and then the vport is created on the Physical Port:
97 /sys/devices/.../host17/vport-17:0-0 97 /sys/devices/.../host17/vport-17:0-0
@@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Vport States:
192 independent of the adapter's link state. 192 independent of the adapter's link state.
193 - Instantiation of the vport on the FC link via ELS traffic, etc. 193 - Instantiation of the vport on the FC link via ELS traffic, etc.
194 This is equivalent to a "link up" and successfull link initialization. 194 This is equivalent to a "link up" and successfull link initialization.
195 Futher information can be found in the interfaces section below for 195 Further information can be found in the interfaces section below for
196 Vport Creation. 196 Vport Creation.
197 197
198 Once a vport has been instantiated with the kernel/LLDD, a vport state 198 Once a vport has been instantiated with the kernel/LLDD, a vport state
diff --git a/Documentation/serial/driver b/Documentation/serial/driver
index 88ad615dd338..77ba0afbe4db 100644
--- a/Documentation/serial/driver
+++ b/Documentation/serial/driver
@@ -186,6 +186,17 @@ hardware.
186 Locking: port_sem taken. 186 Locking: port_sem taken.
187 Interrupts: caller dependent. 187 Interrupts: caller dependent.
188 188
189 flush_buffer(port)
190 Flush any write buffers, reset any DMA state and stop any
191 ongoing DMA transfers.
192
193 This will be called whenever the port->info->xmit circular
194 buffer is cleared.
195
196 Locking: port->lock taken.
197 Interrupts: locally disabled.
198 This call must not sleep
199
189 set_termios(port,termios,oldtermios) 200 set_termios(port,termios,oldtermios)
190 Change the port parameters, including word length, parity, stop 201 Change the port parameters, including word length, parity, stop
191 bits. Update read_status_mask and ignore_status_mask to indicate 202 bits. Update read_status_mask and ignore_status_mask to indicate
diff --git a/Documentation/sh/clk.txt b/Documentation/sh/clk.txt
index 9aef710e9a4b..114b595cfa97 100644
--- a/Documentation/sh/clk.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sh/clk.txt
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ means no changes to adjanced clock
12Internally, the clk_set_rate_ex forwards request to clk->ops->set_rate method, 12Internally, the clk_set_rate_ex forwards request to clk->ops->set_rate method,
13if it is present in ops structure. The method should set the clock rate and adjust 13if it is present in ops structure. The method should set the clock rate and adjust
14all needed clocks according to the passed algo_id. 14all needed clocks according to the passed algo_id.
15Exact values for algo_id are machine-dependend. For the sh7722, the following 15Exact values for algo_id are machine-dependent. For the sh7722, the following
16values are defined: 16values are defined:
17 17
18 NO_CHANGE = 0, 18 NO_CHANGE = 0,
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt
index 2ad5e6306c44..a4c53d8961e1 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/Audiophile-Usb.txt
@@ -236,15 +236,15 @@ The parameter can be given:
236 alias snd-card-1 snd-usb-audio 236 alias snd-card-1 snd-usb-audio
237 options snd-usb-audio index=1 device_setup=0x09 237 options snd-usb-audio index=1 device_setup=0x09
238 238
239CAUTION when initializaing the device 239CAUTION when initializing the device
240------------------------------------- 240-------------------------------------
241 241
242 * Correct initialization on the device requires that device_setup is given to 242 * Correct initialization on the device requires that device_setup is given to
243 the module BEFORE the device is turned on. So, if you use the "manual probing" 243 the module BEFORE the device is turned on. So, if you use the "manual probing"
244 method described above, take care to power-on the device AFTER this initialization. 244 method described above, take care to power-on the device AFTER this initialization.
245 245
246 * Failing to respect this will lead in a misconfiguration of the device. In this case 246 * Failing to respect this will lead to a misconfiguration of the device. In this case
247 turn off the device, unproble the snd-usb-audio module, then probe it again with 247 turn off the device, unprobe the snd-usb-audio module, then probe it again with
248 correct device_setup parameter and then (and only then) turn on the device again. 248 correct device_setup parameter and then (and only then) turn on the device again.
249 249
250 * If you've correctly initialized the device in a valid mode and then want to switch 250 * If you've correctly initialized the device in a valid mode and then want to switch
@@ -388,9 +388,9 @@ There are 2 main potential issues when using Jackd with the device:
388 388
389Jack supports big endian devices only in recent versions (thanks to 389Jack supports big endian devices only in recent versions (thanks to
390Andreas Steinmetz for his first big-endian patch). I can't remember 390Andreas Steinmetz for his first big-endian patch). I can't remember
391extacly when this support was released into jackd, let's just say that 391exactly when this support was released into jackd, let's just say that
392with jackd version 0.103.0 it's almost ok (just a small bug is affecting 392with jackd version 0.103.0 it's almost ok (just a small bug is affecting
39316bits Big-Endian devices, but since you've read carefully the above 39316bits Big-Endian devices, but since you've read carefully the above
394paragraphs, you're now using kernel >= 2.6.23 and your 16bits devices 394paragraphs, you're now using kernel >= 2.6.23 and your 16bits devices
395are now Little Endians ;-) ). 395are now Little Endians ;-) ).
396 396
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl
index c4d2e3507af9..9d644f7e241e 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/DocBook/alsa-driver-api.tmpl
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
42 <sect1><title>Device Components</title> 42 <sect1><title>Device Components</title>
43!Esound/core/device.c 43!Esound/core/device.c
44 </sect1> 44 </sect1>
45 <sect1><title>KMOD and Device File Entries</title> 45 <sect1><title>Module requests and Device File Entries</title>
46!Esound/core/sound.c 46!Esound/core/sound.c
47 </sect1> 47 </sect1>
48 <sect1><title>Memory Management Helpers</title> 48 <sect1><title>Memory Management Helpers</title>
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt
index 8e1b02526698..34e87ec1379c 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/hda_codec.txt
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ CONFIG_SND_HDA_POWER_SAVE kconfig. It's called when the codec needs
67to power up or may power down. The controller should check the all 67to power up or may power down. The controller should check the all
68belonging codecs on the bus whether they are actually powered off 68belonging codecs on the bus whether they are actually powered off
69(check codec->power_on), and optionally the driver may power down the 69(check codec->power_on), and optionally the driver may power down the
70contoller side, too. 70controller side, too.
71 71
72The bus instance is created via snd_hda_bus_new(). You need to pass 72The bus instance is created via snd_hda_bus_new(). You need to pass
73the card instance, the template, and the pointer to store the 73the card instance, the template, and the pointer to store the
diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt
index c784a18b94dc..b2ed6983f40d 100644
--- a/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa/soc/dapm.txt
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ Audio DAPM widgets fall into a number of types:-
68(Widgets are defined in include/sound/soc-dapm.h) 68(Widgets are defined in include/sound/soc-dapm.h)
69 69
70Widgets are usually added in the codec driver and the machine driver. There are 70Widgets are usually added in the codec driver and the machine driver. There are
71convience macros defined in soc-dapm.h that can be used to quickly build a 71convenience macros defined in soc-dapm.h that can be used to quickly build a
72list of widgets of the codecs and machines DAPM widgets. 72list of widgets of the codecs and machines DAPM widgets.
73 73
74Most widgets have a name, register, shift and invert. Some widgets have extra 74Most widgets have a name, register, shift and invert. Some widgets have extra
diff --git a/Documentation/specialix.txt b/Documentation/specialix.txt
index 4a4b428ce8f6..6eb6f3a3331c 100644
--- a/Documentation/specialix.txt
+++ b/Documentation/specialix.txt
@@ -270,8 +270,8 @@ The pinout of the connectors on the IO8+ is:
270Hardware handshaking issues. 270Hardware handshaking issues.
271============================ 271============================
272 272
273The driver can be compiled in two different ways. The default 273The driver can be told to operate in two different ways. The default
274("Specialix DTR/RTS pin is RTS" is off) the pin behaves as DTR when 274behaviour is specialix.sx_rtscts = 0 where the pin behaves as DTR when
275hardware handshaking is off. It behaves as the RTS hardware 275hardware handshaking is off. It behaves as the RTS hardware
276handshaking signal when hardware handshaking is selected. 276handshaking signal when hardware handshaking is selected.
277 277
@@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ cable will either be compatible with hardware handshaking or with
280software handshaking. So switching on the fly is not really an 280software handshaking. So switching on the fly is not really an
281option. 281option.
282 282
283I actually prefer to use the "Specialix DTR/RTS pin is RTS" option. 283I actually prefer to use the "specialix.sx_rtscts=1" option.
284This makes the DTR/RTS pin always an RTS pin, and ioctls to 284This makes the DTR/RTS pin always an RTS pin, and ioctls to
285change DTR are always ignored. I have a cable that is configured 285change DTR are always ignored. I have a cable that is configured
286for this. 286for this.
@@ -379,7 +379,5 @@ it doesn't fit in your computer, bring back the card.
379 You have to WRITE to the address register to even 379 You have to WRITE to the address register to even
380 read-probe a CD186x register. Disable autodetection? 380 read-probe a CD186x register. Disable autodetection?
381 -- Specialix: any suggestions? 381 -- Specialix: any suggestions?
382 - Arbitrary baud rates are not implemented yet.
383 If you need this, bug me about it.
384 382
385 383
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
index 8a4863c4edd4..d79eeda7a699 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ of kilobytes free. The VM uses this number to compute a pages_min
116value for each lowmem zone in the system. Each lowmem zone gets 116value for each lowmem zone in the system. Each lowmem zone gets
117a number of reserved free pages based proportionally on its size. 117a number of reserved free pages based proportionally on its size.
118 118
119Some minimal ammount of memory is needed to satisfy PF_MEMALLOC 119Some minimal amount of memory is needed to satisfy PF_MEMALLOC
120allocations; if you set this to lower than 1024KB, your system will 120allocations; if you set this to lower than 1024KB, your system will
121become subtly broken, and prone to deadlock under high loads. 121become subtly broken, and prone to deadlock under high loads.
122 122
diff --git a/Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt b/Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt
index 80ef562160bb..6049a2a84dda 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysfs-rules.txt
@@ -3,9 +3,8 @@ Rules on how to access information in the Linux kernel sysfs
3The kernel-exported sysfs exports internal kernel implementation details 3The kernel-exported sysfs exports internal kernel implementation details
4and depends on internal kernel structures and layout. It is agreed upon 4and depends on internal kernel structures and layout. It is agreed upon
5by the kernel developers that the Linux kernel does not provide a stable 5by the kernel developers that the Linux kernel does not provide a stable
6internal API. As sysfs is a direct export of kernel internal 6internal API. Therefore, there are aspects of the sysfs interface that
7structures, the sysfs interface cannot provide a stable interface either; 7may not be stable across kernel releases.
8it may always change along with internal kernel changes.
9 8
10To minimize the risk of breaking users of sysfs, which are in most cases 9To minimize the risk of breaking users of sysfs, which are in most cases
11low-level userspace applications, with a new kernel release, the users 10low-level userspace applications, with a new kernel release, the users
diff --git a/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt b/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt
index 621024fd3a18..44d124005bad 100644
--- a/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt
+++ b/Documentation/telephony/ixj.txt
@@ -305,21 +305,14 @@ driver, like this:
305 305
306which will result in the needed drivers getting loaded automatically. 306which will result in the needed drivers getting loaded automatically.
307 307
308 g. if you are planning on using kerneld to automatically load the 308 g. if you are planning on having the kernel automatically request
309module for you, then you need to edit /etc/conf.modules and add the 309the module for you, then you need to edit /etc/conf.modules and add the
310following lines: 310following lines:
311 311
312 options ixj dspio=0x340 xio=0x330 ixjdebug=0 312 options ixj dspio=0x340 xio=0x330 ixjdebug=0
313 313
314If you do this, then when you execute an application that uses the 314If you do this, then when you execute an application that uses the
315module kerneld will load the module for you. Note that to do this, 315module the kernel will request that it is loaded.
316you need to have your kernel set to support kerneld. You can check
317for this by looking at /usr/src/linux/.config and you should see this:
318
319 # Loadable module support
320 #
321 <snip>
322 CONFIG_KMOD=y
323 316
324 h. if you want non-root users to be able to read and write to the 317 h. if you want non-root users to be able to read and write to the
325ixj devices (this is a good idea!) you should do the following: 318ixj devices (this is a good idea!) you should do the following:
diff --git a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt
index a73ecf5b4bdb..21332233cef1 100644
--- a/Documentation/timers/highres.txt
+++ b/Documentation/timers/highres.txt
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ increase of flexibility and the avoidance of duplicated code across
125architectures justifies the slight increase of the binary size. 125architectures justifies the slight increase of the binary size.
126 126
127The conversion of an architecture has no functional impact, but allows to 127The conversion of an architecture has no functional impact, but allows to
128utilize the high resolution and dynamic tick functionalites without any change 128utilize the high resolution and dynamic tick functionalities without any change
129to the clock event device and timer interrupt code. After the conversion the 129to the clock event device and timer interrupt code. After the conversion the
130enabling of high resolution timers and dynamic ticks is simply provided by 130enabling of high resolution timers and dynamic ticks is simply provided by
131adding the kernel/time/Kconfig file to the architecture specific Kconfig and 131adding the kernel/time/Kconfig file to the architecture specific Kconfig and
diff --git a/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt b/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt
index b0472ac5226a..f866c72291bf 100644
--- a/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt
+++ b/Documentation/unaligned-memory-access.txt
@@ -218,9 +218,35 @@ If use of such macros is not convenient, another option is to use memcpy(),
218where the source or destination (or both) are of type u8* or unsigned char*. 218where the source or destination (or both) are of type u8* or unsigned char*.
219Due to the byte-wise nature of this operation, unaligned accesses are avoided. 219Due to the byte-wise nature of this operation, unaligned accesses are avoided.
220 220
221
222Alignment vs. Networking
223========================
224
225On architectures that require aligned loads, networking requires that the IP
226header is aligned on a four-byte boundary to optimise the IP stack. For
227regular ethernet hardware, the constant NET_IP_ALIGN is used. On most
228architectures this constant has the value 2 because the normal ethernet
229header is 14 bytes long, so in order to get proper alignment one needs to
230DMA to an address which can be expressed as 4*n + 2. One notable exception
231here is powerpc which defines NET_IP_ALIGN to 0 because DMA to unaligned
232addresses can be very expensive and dwarf the cost of unaligned loads.
233
234For some ethernet hardware that cannot DMA to unaligned addresses like
2354*n+2 or non-ethernet hardware, this can be a problem, and it is then
236required to copy the incoming frame into an aligned buffer. Because this is
237unnecessary on architectures that can do unaligned accesses, the code can be
238made dependent on CONFIG_HAVE_EFFICIENT_UNALIGNED_ACCESS like so:
239
240#ifdef CONFIG_HAVE_EFFICIENT_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
241 skb = original skb
242#else
243 skb = copy skb
244#endif
245
221-- 246--
222Author: Daniel Drake <dsd@gentoo.org> 247Authors: Daniel Drake <dsd@gentoo.org>,
248 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
223With help from: Alan Cox, Avuton Olrich, Heikki Orsila, Jan Engelhardt, 249With help from: Alan Cox, Avuton Olrich, Heikki Orsila, Jan Engelhardt,
224Johannes Berg, Kyle McMartin, Kyle Moffett, Randy Dunlap, Robert Hancock, 250Kyle McMartin, Kyle Moffett, Randy Dunlap, Robert Hancock, Uli Kunitz,
225Uli Kunitz, Vadim Lobanov 251Vadim Lobanov
226 252
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
index 2af400609498..381b22ee7834 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/authorization.txt
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ not) in a system. This feature will allow you to implement a lock-down
8of USB devices, fully controlled by user space. 8of USB devices, fully controlled by user space.
9 9
10As of now, when a USB device is connected it is configured and 10As of now, when a USB device is connected it is configured and
11it's interfaces inmediately made available to the users. With this 11its interfaces are immediately made available to the users. With this
12modification, only if root authorizes the device to be configured will 12modification, only if root authorizes the device to be configured will
13then it be possible to use it. 13then it be possible to use it.
14 14
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt b/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt
index 815f5c2301ff..9b22bd14c348 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/gadget_serial.txt
@@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
1 1
2 Linux Gadget Serial Driver v2.0 2 Linux Gadget Serial Driver v2.0
3 11/20/2004 3 11/20/2004
4 (updated 8-May-2008 for v2.3)
4 5
5 6
6License and Disclaimer 7License and Disclaimer
@@ -31,7 +32,7 @@ Prerequisites
31------------- 32-------------
32Versions of the gadget serial driver are available for the 33Versions of the gadget serial driver are available for the
332.4 Linux kernels, but this document assumes you are using 342.4 Linux kernels, but this document assumes you are using
34version 2.0 or later of the gadget serial driver in a 2.6 35version 2.3 or later of the gadget serial driver in a 2.6
35Linux kernel. 36Linux kernel.
36 37
37This document assumes that you are familiar with Linux and 38This document assumes that you are familiar with Linux and
@@ -40,6 +41,12 @@ standard utilities, use minicom and HyperTerminal, and work with
40USB and serial devices. It also assumes you configure the Linux 41USB and serial devices. It also assumes you configure the Linux
41gadget and usb drivers as modules. 42gadget and usb drivers as modules.
42 43
44With version 2.3 of the driver, major and minor device nodes are
45no longer statically defined. Your Linux based system should mount
46sysfs in /sys, and use "mdev" (in Busybox) or "udev" to make the
47/dev nodes matching the sysfs /sys/class/tty files.
48
49
43 50
44Overview 51Overview
45-------- 52--------
@@ -104,15 +111,8 @@ driver. All this are listed under "USB Gadget Support" when
104configuring the kernel. Then rebuild and install the kernel or 111configuring the kernel. Then rebuild and install the kernel or
105modules. 112modules.
106 113
107The gadget serial driver uses major number 127, for now. So you
108will need to create a device node for it, like this:
109
110 mknod /dev/ttygserial c 127 0
111
112You only need to do this once.
113
114Then you must load the gadget serial driver. To load it as an 114Then you must load the gadget serial driver. To load it as an
115ACM device, do this: 115ACM device (recommended for interoperability), do this:
116 116
117 modprobe g_serial use_acm=1 117 modprobe g_serial use_acm=1
118 118
@@ -125,6 +125,23 @@ controller driver. This must be done each time you reboot the gadget
125side Linux system. You can add this to the start up scripts, if 125side Linux system. You can add this to the start up scripts, if
126desired. 126desired.
127 127
128Your system should use mdev (from busybox) or udev to make the
129device nodes. After this gadget driver has been set up you should
130then see a /dev/ttyGS0 node:
131
132 # ls -l /dev/ttyGS0 | cat
133 crw-rw---- 1 root root 253, 0 May 8 14:10 /dev/ttyGS0
134 #
135
136Note that the major number (253, above) is system-specific. If
137you need to create /dev nodes by hand, the right numbers to use
138will be in the /sys/class/tty/ttyGS0/dev file.
139
140When you link this gadget driver early, perhaps even statically,
141you may want to set up an /etc/inittab entry to run "getty" on it.
142The /dev/ttyGS0 line should work like most any other serial port.
143
144
128If gadget serial is loaded as an ACM device you will want to use 145If gadget serial is loaded as an ACM device you will want to use
129either the Windows or Linux ACM driver on the host side. If gadget 146either the Windows or Linux ACM driver on the host side. If gadget
130serial is loaded as a bulk in/out device, you will want to use the 147serial is loaded as a bulk in/out device, you will want to use the
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/persist.txt b/Documentation/usb/persist.txt
index d56cb1a11550..074b159b77c2 100644
--- a/Documentation/usb/persist.txt
+++ b/Documentation/usb/persist.txt
@@ -81,8 +81,11 @@ re-enumeration shows that the device now attached to that port has the
81same descriptors as before, including the Vendor and Product IDs, then 81same descriptors as before, including the Vendor and Product IDs, then
82the kernel continues to use the same device structure. In effect, the 82the kernel continues to use the same device structure. In effect, the
83kernel treats the device as though it had merely been reset instead of 83kernel treats the device as though it had merely been reset instead of
84unplugged. The same thing happens if the host controller is in the 84unplugged.
85expected state but a USB device was unplugged and then replugged. 85
86The same thing happens if the host controller is in the expected state
87but a USB device was unplugged and then replugged, or if a USB device
88fails to carry out a normal resume.
86 89
87If no device is now attached to the port, or if the descriptors are 90If no device is now attached to the port, or if the descriptors are
88different from what the kernel remembers, then the treatment is what 91different from what the kernel remembers, then the treatment is what
diff --git a/Documentation/usb/uhci.txt b/Documentation/usb/uhci.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f25952c86c6..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/usb/uhci.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,165 +0,0 @@
1Specification and Internals for the New UHCI Driver (Whitepaper...)
2
3 brought to you by
4
5 Georg Acher, acher@in.tum.de (executive slave) (base guitar)
6 Deti Fliegl, deti@fliegl.de (executive slave) (lead voice)
7 Thomas Sailer, sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch (chief consultant) (cheer leader)
8
9 $Id: README.uhci,v 1.1 1999/12/14 14:03:02 fliegl Exp $
10
11This document and the new uhci sources can be found on
12 http://hotswap.in.tum.de/usb
13
141. General issues
15
161.1 Why a new UHCI driver, we already have one?!?
17
18Correct, but its internal structure got more and more mixed up by the (still
19ongoing) efforts to get isochronous transfers (ISO) to work.
20Since there is an increasing need for reliable ISO-transfers (especially
21for USB-audio needed by TS and for a DAB-USB-Receiver build by GA and DF),
22this state was a bit unsatisfying in our opinion, so we've decided (based
23on knowledge and experiences with the old UHCI driver) to start
24from scratch with a new approach, much simpler but at the same time more
25powerful.
26It is inspired by the way Win98/Win2000 handles USB requests via URBs,
27but it's definitely 100% free of MS-code and doesn't crash while
28unplugging an used ISO-device like Win98 ;-)
29Some code for HW setup and root hub management was taken from the
30original UHCI driver, but heavily modified to fit into the new code.
31The invention of the basic concept, and major coding were completed in two
32days (and nights) on the 16th and 17th of October 1999, now known as the
33great USB-October-Revolution started by GA, DF, and TS ;-)
34
35Since the concept is in no way UHCI dependent, we hope that it will also be
36transferred to the OHCI-driver, so both drivers share a common API.
37
381.2. Advantages and disadvantages
39
40+ All USB transfer types work now!
41+ Asynchronous operation
42+ Simple, but powerful interface (only two calls for start and cancel)
43+ Easy migration to the new API, simplified by a compatibility API
44+ Simple usage of ISO transfers
45+ Automatic linking of requests
46+ ISO transfers allow variable length for each frame and striping
47+ No CPU dependent and non-portable atomic memory access, no asm()-inlines
48+ Tested on x86 and Alpha
49
50- Rewriting for ISO transfers needed
51
521.3. Is there some compatibility to the old API?
53
54Yes, but only for control, bulk and interrupt transfers. We've implemented
55some wrapper calls for these transfer types. The usbcore works fine with
56these wrappers. For ISO there's no compatibility, because the old ISO-API
57and its semantics were unnecessary complicated in our opinion.
58
591.4. What's really working?
60
61As said above, CTRL and BULK already work fine even with the wrappers,
62so legacy code wouldn't notice the change.
63Regarding to Thomas, ISO transfers now run stable with USB audio.
64INT transfers (e.g. mouse driver) work fine, too.
65
661.5. Are there any bugs?
67
68No ;-)
69Hm...
70Well, of course this implementation needs extensive testing on all available
71hardware, but we believe that any fixes shouldn't harm the overall concept.
72
731.6. What should be done next?
74
75A large part of the request handling seems to be identical for UHCI and
76OHCI, so it would be a good idea to extract the common parts and have only
77the HW specific stuff in uhci.c. Furthermore, all other USB device drivers
78should need URBification, if they use isochronous or interrupt transfers.
79One thing missing in the current implementation (and the old UHCI driver)
80is fair queueing for BULK transfers. Since this would need (in principle)
81the alteration of already constructed TD chains (to switch from depth to
82breadth execution), another way has to be found. Maybe some simple
83heuristics work with the same effect.
84
85---------------------------------------------------------------------------
86
872. Internal structure and mechanisms
88
89To get quickly familiar with the internal structures, here's a short
90description how the new UHCI driver works. However, the ultimate source of
91truth is only uhci.c!
92
932.1. Descriptor structure (QHs and TDs)
94
95During initialization, the following skeleton is allocated in init_skel:
96
97 framespecific | common chain
98
99framelist[]
100[ 0 ]-----> TD --> TD -------\
101[ 1 ]-----> TD --> TD --------> TD ----> QH -------> QH -------> QH ---> NULL
102 ... TD --> TD -------/
103[1023]-----> TD --> TD ------/
104
105 ^^ ^^ ^^ ^^ ^^ ^^
106 1024 TDs for 7 TDs for 1 TD for Start of Start of End Chain
107 ISO INT (2-128ms) 1ms-INT CTRL Chain BULK Chain
108
109For each CTRL or BULK transfer a new QH is allocated and the containing data
110transfers are appended as (vertical) TDs. After building the whole QH with its
111dangling TDs, the QH is inserted before the BULK Chain QH (for CTRL) or
112before the End Chain QH (for BULK). Since only the QH->next pointers are
113affected, no atomic memory operation is required. The three QHs in the
114common chain are never equipped with TDs!
115
116For ISO or INT, the TD for each frame is simply inserted into the appropriate
117ISO/INT-TD-chain for the desired frame. The 7 skeleton INT-TDs are scattered
118among the 1024 frames similar to the old UHCI driver.
119
120For CTRL/BULK/ISO, the last TD in the transfer has the IOC-bit set. For INT,
121every TD (there is only one...) has the IOC-bit set.
122
123Besides the data for the UHCI controller (2 or 4 32bit words), the descriptors
124are double-linked through the .vertical and .horizontal elements in the
125SW data of the descriptor (using the double-linked list structures and
126operations), but SW-linking occurs only in closed domains, i.e. for each of
127the 1024 ISO-chains and the 8 INT-chains there is a closed cycle. This
128simplifies all insertions and unlinking operations and avoids costly
129bus_to_virt()-calls.
130
1312.2. URB structure and linking to QH/TDs
132
133During assembly of the QH and TDs of the requested action, these descriptors
134are stored in urb->urb_list, so the allocated QH/TD descriptors are bound to
135this URB.
136If the assembly was successful and the descriptors were added to the HW chain,
137the corresponding URB is inserted into a global URB list for this controller.
138This list stores all pending URBs.
139
1402.3. Interrupt processing
141
142Since UHCI provides no means to directly detect completed transactions, the
143following is done in each UHCI interrupt (uhci_interrupt()):
144
145For each URB in the pending queue (process_urb()), the ACTIVE-flag of the
146associated TDs are processed (depending on the transfer type
147process_{transfer|interrupt|iso}()). If the TDs are not active anymore,
148they indicate the completion of the transaction and the status is calculated.
149Inactive QH/TDs are removed from the HW chain (since the host controller
150already removed the TDs from the QH, no atomic access is needed) and
151eventually the URB is marked as completed (OK or errors) and removed from the
152pending queue. Then the next linked URB is submitted. After (or immediately
153before) that, the completion handler is called.
154
1552.4. Unlinking URBs
156
157First, all QH/TDs stored in the URB are unlinked from the HW chain.
158To ensure that the host controller really left a vertical TD chain, we
159wait for one frame. After that, the TDs are physically destroyed.
160
1612.5. URB linking and the consequences
162
163Since URBs can be linked and the corresponding submit_urb is called in
164the UHCI-interrupt, all work associated with URB/QH/TD assembly has to be
165interrupt save. This forces kmalloc to use GFP_ATOMIC in the interrupt.
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
index 191194ea1e25..f0e613ba55b8 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.cx23885
@@ -8,3 +8,4 @@
8 7 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1200 [0070:71d1,0070:71d3] 8 7 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1200 [0070:71d1,0070:71d3]
9 8 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1700 [0070:8101] 9 8 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1700 [0070:8101]
10 9 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1400 [0070:8010] 10 9 -> Hauppauge WinTV-HVR1400 [0070:8010]
11 10 -> DViCO FusionHDTV7 Dual Express [18ac:d618]
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
index 1d6a245c828f..10591467ef16 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.em28xx
@@ -8,10 +8,13 @@
8 7 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II (em2800) 8 7 -> Leadtek Winfast USB II (em2800)
9 8 -> Kworld USB2800 (em2800) 9 8 -> Kworld USB2800 (em2800)
10 9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/DVC 100 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0207,2304:021a] 10 9 -> Pinnacle Dazzle DVC 90/DVC 100 (em2820/em2840) [2304:0207,2304:021a]
11 10 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (em2880) [2040:6500,2040:6502] 11 10 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (em2880) [2040:6500]
12 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) [0ccd:0042] 12 11 -> Terratec Hybrid XS (em2880) [0ccd:0042]
13 12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF (em2820/em2840) 13 12 -> Kworld PVR TV 2800 RF (em2820/em2840)
14 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047] 14 13 -> Terratec Prodigy XS (em2880) [0ccd:0047]
15 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840) 15 14 -> Pixelview Prolink PlayTV USB 2.0 (em2820/em2840)
16 15 -> V-Gear PocketTV (em2800) 16 15 -> V-Gear PocketTV (em2800)
17 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2880) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f] 17 16 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 950 (em2880) [2040:6513,2040:6517,2040:651b,2040:651f]
18 17 -> Pinnacle PCTV HD Pro Stick (em2880) [2304:0227]
19 18 -> Hauppauge WinTV HVR 900 (R2) (em2880) [2040:6502]
20 19 -> PointNix Intra-Oral Camera (em2860)
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134 b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
index 67937df1e974..39868af9cf9f 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/CARDLIST.saa7134
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@
37 36 -> UPMOST PURPLE TV [12ab:0800] 37 36 -> UPMOST PURPLE TV [12ab:0800]
38 37 -> Items MuchTV Plus / IT-005 38 37 -> Items MuchTV Plus / IT-005
39 38 -> Terratec Cinergy 200 TV [153b:1152] 39 38 -> Terratec Cinergy 200 TV [153b:1152]
40 39 -> LifeView FlyTV Platinum Mini [5168:0212,4e42:0212] 40 39 -> LifeView FlyTV Platinum Mini [5168:0212,4e42:0212,5169:1502]
41 40 -> Compro VideoMate TV PVR/FM [185b:c100] 41 40 -> Compro VideoMate TV PVR/FM [185b:c100]
42 41 -> Compro VideoMate TV Gold+ [185b:c100] 42 41 -> Compro VideoMate TV Gold+ [185b:c100]
43 42 -> Sabrent SBT-TVFM (saa7130) 43 42 -> Sabrent SBT-TVFM (saa7130)
@@ -128,7 +128,7 @@
128127 -> Beholder BeholdTV 507 FM/RDS / BeholdTV 509 FM [0000:5071,0000:507B,5ace:5070,5ace:5090] 128127 -> Beholder BeholdTV 507 FM/RDS / BeholdTV 509 FM [0000:5071,0000:507B,5ace:5070,5ace:5090]
129128 -> Beholder BeholdTV Columbus TVFM [0000:5201] 129128 -> Beholder BeholdTV Columbus TVFM [0000:5201]
130129 -> Beholder BeholdTV 607 / BeholdTV 609 [5ace:6070,5ace:6071,5ace:6072,5ace:6073,5ace:6090,5ace:6091,5ace:6092,5ace:6093] 130129 -> Beholder BeholdTV 607 / BeholdTV 609 [5ace:6070,5ace:6071,5ace:6072,5ace:6073,5ace:6090,5ace:6091,5ace:6092,5ace:6093]
131130 -> Beholder BeholdTV M6 / BeholdTV M6 Extra [5ace:6190,5ace:6193,5ace:6191] 131130 -> Beholder BeholdTV M6 [5ace:6190]
132131 -> Twinhan Hybrid DTV-DVB 3056 PCI [1822:0022] 132131 -> Twinhan Hybrid DTV-DVB 3056 PCI [1822:0022]
133132 -> Genius TVGO AM11MCE 133132 -> Genius TVGO AM11MCE
134133 -> NXP Snake DVB-S reference design 134133 -> NXP Snake DVB-S reference design
@@ -141,3 +141,7 @@
141140 -> Avermedia DVB-S Pro A700 [1461:a7a1] 141140 -> Avermedia DVB-S Pro A700 [1461:a7a1]
142141 -> Avermedia DVB-S Hybrid+FM A700 [1461:a7a2] 142141 -> Avermedia DVB-S Hybrid+FM A700 [1461:a7a2]
143142 -> Beholder BeholdTV H6 [5ace:6290] 143142 -> Beholder BeholdTV H6 [5ace:6290]
144143 -> Beholder BeholdTV M63 [5ace:6191]
145144 -> Beholder BeholdTV M6 Extra [5ace:6193]
146145 -> AVerMedia MiniPCI DVB-T Hybrid M103 [1461:f636]
147146 -> ASUSTeK P7131 Analog
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/cx18.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/cx18.txt
index 6842c262890f..914cb7e734a2 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/cx18.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/cx18.txt
@@ -1,36 +1,30 @@
1Some notes regarding the cx18 driver for the Conexant CX23418 MPEG 1Some notes regarding the cx18 driver for the Conexant CX23418 MPEG
2encoder chip: 2encoder chip:
3 3
41) The only hardware currently supported is the Hauppauge HVR-1600 41) Currently supported are:
5 card and the Compro VideoMate H900 (note that this card only
6 supports analog input, it has no digital tuner!).
7 5
82) Some people have problems getting the i2c bus to work. Cause unknown. 6 - Hauppauge HVR-1600
9 The symptom is that the eeprom cannot be read and the card is 7 - Compro VideoMate H900
10 unusable. 8 - Yuan MPC718
9 - Conexant Raptor PAL/SECAM devkit
11 10
123) The audio from the analog tuner is mono only. Probably caused by 112) Some people have problems getting the i2c bus to work.
13 incorrect audio register information in the datasheet. We are 12 The symptom is that the eeprom cannot be read and the card is
14 waiting for updated information from Conexant. 13 unusable. This is probably fixed, but if you have problems
14 then post to the video4linux or ivtv-users mailinglist.
15 15
164) VBI (raw or sliced) has not yet been implemented. 163) VBI (raw or sliced) has not yet been implemented.
17 17
185) MPEG indexing is not yet implemented. 184) MPEG indexing is not yet implemented.
19 19
206) The driver is still a bit rough around the edges, this should 205) The driver is still a bit rough around the edges, this should
21 improve over time. 21 improve over time.
22 22
23 23
24Firmware: 24Firmware:
25 25
26The firmware needs to be extracted from the Windows Hauppauge HVR-1600 26You can obtain the firmware files here:
27driver, available here:
28
29http://hauppauge.lightpath.net/software/install_cd/hauppauge_cd_3.4d1.zip
30 27
31Unzip, then copy the following files to the firmware directory 28http://dl.ivtvdriver.org/ivtv/firmware/cx18-firmware.tar.gz
32and rename them as follows:
33 29
34Drivers/Driver18/hcw18apu.rom -> v4l-cx23418-apu.fw 30Untar and copy the .fw files to your firmware directory.
35Drivers/Driver18/hcw18enc.rom -> v4l-cx23418-cpu.fw
36Drivers/Driver18/hcw18mlC.rom -> v4l-cx23418-dig.fw
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0c4880af57a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/gspca.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,243 @@
1List of the webcams know by gspca.
2
3The modules are:
4 gspca_main main driver
5 gspca_xxxx subdriver module with xxxx as follows
6
7xxxx vend:prod
8----
9spca501 0000:0000 MystFromOri Unknow Camera
10spca501 040a:0002 Kodak DVC-325
11spca500 040a:0300 Kodak EZ200
12zc3xx 041e:041e Creative WebCam Live!
13spca500 041e:400a Creative PC-CAM 300
14sunplus 041e:400b Creative PC-CAM 600
15sunplus 041e:4012 PC-Cam350
16sunplus 041e:4013 Creative Pccam750
17zc3xx 041e:4017 Creative Webcam Mobile PD1090
18spca508 041e:4018 Creative Webcam Vista (PD1100)
19spca561 041e:401a Creative Webcam Vista (PD1100)
20zc3xx 041e:401c Creative NX
21spca505 041e:401d Creative Webcam NX ULTRA
22zc3xx 041e:401e Creative Nx Pro
23zc3xx 041e:401f Creative Webcam Notebook PD1171
24pac207 041e:4028 Creative Webcam Vista Plus
25zc3xx 041e:4029 Creative WebCam Vista Pro
26zc3xx 041e:4034 Creative Instant P0620
27zc3xx 041e:4035 Creative Instant P0620D
28zc3xx 041e:4036 Creative Live !
29zc3xx 041e:403a Creative Nx Pro 2
30spca561 041e:403b Creative Webcam Vista (VF0010)
31zc3xx 041e:4051 Creative Live!Cam Notebook Pro (VF0250)
32ov519 041e:4052 Creative Live! VISTA IM
33zc3xx 041e:4053 Creative Live!Cam Video IM
34ov519 041e:405f Creative Live! VISTA VF0330
35ov519 041e:4060 Creative Live! VISTA VF0350
36ov519 041e:4061 Creative Live! VISTA VF0400
37ov519 041e:4064 Creative Live! VISTA VF0420
38ov519 041e:4068 Creative Live! VISTA VF0470
39spca561 0458:7004 Genius VideoCAM Express V2
40sunplus 0458:7006 Genius Dsc 1.3 Smart
41zc3xx 0458:7007 Genius VideoCam V2
42zc3xx 0458:700c Genius VideoCam V3
43zc3xx 0458:700f Genius VideoCam Web V2
44sonixj 0458:7025 Genius Eye 311Q
45sonixj 045e:00f5 MicroSoft VX3000
46sonixj 045e:00f7 MicroSoft VX1000
47ov519 045e:028c Micro$oft xbox cam
48spca508 0461:0815 Micro Innovation IC200
49sunplus 0461:0821 Fujifilm MV-1
50zc3xx 0461:0a00 MicroInnovation WebCam320
51spca500 046d:0890 Logitech QuickCam traveler
52vc032x 046d:0892 Logitech Orbicam
53vc032x 046d:0896 Logitech Orbicam
54zc3xx 046d:08a0 Logitech QC IM
55zc3xx 046d:08a1 Logitech QC IM 0x08A1 +sound
56zc3xx 046d:08a2 Labtec Webcam Pro
57zc3xx 046d:08a3 Logitech QC Chat
58zc3xx 046d:08a6 Logitech QCim
59zc3xx 046d:08a7 Logitech QuickCam Image
60zc3xx 046d:08a9 Logitech Notebook Deluxe
61zc3xx 046d:08aa Labtec Webcam Notebook
62zc3xx 046d:08ac Logitech QuickCam Cool
63zc3xx 046d:08ad Logitech QCCommunicate STX
64zc3xx 046d:08ae Logitech QuickCam for Notebooks
65zc3xx 046d:08af Logitech QuickCam Cool
66zc3xx 046d:08b9 Logitech QC IM ???
67zc3xx 046d:08d7 Logitech QCam STX
68zc3xx 046d:08d9 Logitech QuickCam IM/Connect
69zc3xx 046d:08d8 Logitech Notebook Deluxe
70zc3xx 046d:08da Logitech QuickCam Messenger
71zc3xx 046d:08dd Logitech QuickCam for Notebooks
72spca500 046d:0900 Logitech Inc. ClickSmart 310
73spca500 046d:0901 Logitech Inc. ClickSmart 510
74sunplus 046d:0905 Logitech ClickSmart 820
75tv8532 046d:0920 QC Express
76tv8532 046d:0921 Labtec Webcam
77spca561 046d:0928 Logitech QC Express Etch2
78spca561 046d:0929 Labtec Webcam Elch2
79spca561 046d:092a Logitech QC for Notebook
80spca561 046d:092b Labtec Webcam Plus
81spca561 046d:092c Logitech QC chat Elch2
82spca561 046d:092d Logitech QC Elch2
83spca561 046d:092e Logitech QC Elch2
84spca561 046d:092f Logitech QC Elch2
85sunplus 046d:0960 Logitech ClickSmart 420
86sunplus 0471:0322 Philips DMVC1300K
87zc3xx 0471:0325 Philips SPC 200 NC
88zc3xx 0471:0326 Philips SPC 300 NC
89sonixj 0471:0327 Philips SPC 600 NC
90sonixj 0471:0328 Philips SPC 700 NC
91zc3xx 0471:032d Philips spc210nc
92zc3xx 0471:032e Philips spc315nc
93sonixj 0471:0330 Philips SPC 710NC
94spca501 0497:c001 Smile International
95sunplus 04a5:3003 Benq DC 1300
96sunplus 04a5:3008 Benq DC 1500
97sunplus 04a5:300a Benq DC3410
98spca500 04a5:300c Benq DC1016
99sunplus 04f1:1001 JVC GC A50
100spca561 04fc:0561 Flexcam 100
101sunplus 04fc:500c Sunplus CA500C
102sunplus 04fc:504a Aiptek Mini PenCam 1.3
103sunplus 04fc:504b Maxell MaxPocket LE 1.3
104sunplus 04fc:5330 Digitrex 2110
105sunplus 04fc:5360 Sunplus Generic
106spca500 04fc:7333 PalmPixDC85
107sunplus 04fc:ffff Pure DigitalDakota
108spca501 0506:00df 3Com HomeConnect Lite
109sunplus 052b:1513 Megapix V4
110tv8532 0545:808b Veo Stingray
111tv8532 0545:8333 Veo Stingray
112sunplus 0546:3155 Polaroid PDC3070
113sunplus 0546:3191 Polaroid Ion 80
114sunplus 0546:3273 Polaroid PDC2030
115ov519 054c:0154 Sonny toy4
116ov519 054c:0155 Sonny toy5
117zc3xx 055f:c005 Mustek Wcam300A
118spca500 055f:c200 Mustek Gsmart 300
119sunplus 055f:c211 Kowa Bs888e Microcamera
120spca500 055f:c220 Gsmart Mini
121sunplus 055f:c230 Mustek Digicam 330K
122sunplus 055f:c232 Mustek MDC3500
123sunplus 055f:c360 Mustek DV4000 Mpeg4
124sunplus 055f:c420 Mustek gSmart Mini 2
125sunplus 055f:c430 Mustek Gsmart LCD 2
126sunplus 055f:c440 Mustek DV 3000
127sunplus 055f:c520 Mustek gSmart Mini 3
128sunplus 055f:c530 Mustek Gsmart LCD 3
129sunplus 055f:c540 Gsmart D30
130sunplus 055f:c630 Mustek MDC4000
131sunplus 055f:c650 Mustek MDC5500Z
132zc3xx 055f:d003 Mustek WCam300A
133zc3xx 055f:d004 Mustek WCam300 AN
134conex 0572:0041 Creative Notebook cx11646
135ov519 05a9:0519 OmniVision
136ov519 05a9:0530 OmniVision
137ov519 05a9:4519 OmniVision
138ov519 05a9:8519 OmniVision
139sunplus 05da:1018 Digital Dream Enigma 1.3
140stk014 05e1:0893 Syntek DV4000
141spca561 060b:a001 Maxell Compact Pc PM3
142zc3xx 0698:2003 CTX M730V built in
143spca500 06bd:0404 Agfa CL20
144spca500 06be:0800 Optimedia
145sunplus 06d6:0031 Trust 610 LCD PowerC@m Zoom
146spca506 06e1:a190 ADS Instant VCD
147spca508 0733:0110 ViewQuest VQ110
148spca508 0130:0130 Clone Digital Webcam 11043
149spca501 0733:0401 Intel Create and Share
150spca501 0733:0402 ViewQuest M318B
151spca505 0733:0430 Intel PC Camera Pro
152sunplus 0733:1311 Digital Dream Epsilon 1.3
153sunplus 0733:1314 Mercury 2.1MEG Deluxe Classic Cam
154sunplus 0733:2211 Jenoptik jdc 21 LCD
155sunplus 0733:2221 Mercury Digital Pro 3.1p
156sunplus 0733:3261 Concord 3045 spca536a
157sunplus 0733:3281 Cyberpix S550V
158spca506 0734:043b 3DeMon USB Capture aka
159spca500 084d:0003 D-Link DSC-350
160spca500 08ca:0103 Aiptek PocketDV
161sunplus 08ca:0104 Aiptek PocketDVII 1.3
162sunplus 08ca:0106 Aiptek Pocket DV3100+
163sunplus 08ca:2008 Aiptek Mini PenCam 2 M
164sunplus 08ca:2010 Aiptek PocketCam 3M
165sunplus 08ca:2016 Aiptek PocketCam 2 Mega
166sunplus 08ca:2018 Aiptek Pencam SD 2M
167sunplus 08ca:2020 Aiptek Slim 3000F
168sunplus 08ca:2022 Aiptek Slim 3200
169sunplus 08ca:2024 Aiptek DV3500 Mpeg4
170sunplus 08ca:2028 Aiptek PocketCam4M
171sunplus 08ca:2040 Aiptek PocketDV4100M
172sunplus 08ca:2042 Aiptek PocketDV5100
173sunplus 08ca:2050 Medion MD 41437
174sunplus 08ca:2060 Aiptek PocketDV5300
175tv8532 0923:010f ICM532 cams
176mars 093a:050f Mars-Semi Pc-Camera
177pac207 093a:2460 PAC207 Qtec Webcam 100
178pac207 093a:2463 Philips spc200nc pac207
179pac207 093a:2464 Labtec Webcam 1200
180pac207 093a:2468 PAC207
181pac207 093a:2470 Genius GF112
182pac207 093a:2471 PAC207 Genius VideoCam ge111
183pac207 093a:2472 PAC207 Genius VideoCam ge110
184pac7311 093a:2600 PAC7311 Typhoon
185pac7311 093a:2601 PAC7311 Phillips SPC610NC
186pac7311 093a:2603 PAC7312
187pac7311 093a:2608 PAC7311 Trust WB-3300p
188pac7311 093a:260e PAC7311 Gigaware VGA PC Camera, Trust WB-3350p, SIGMA cam 2350
189pac7311 093a:260f PAC7311 SnakeCam
190pac7311 093a:2621 PAC731x
191zc3xx 0ac8:0302 Z-star Vimicro zc0302
192vc032x 0ac8:0321 Vimicro generic vc0321
193vc032x 0ac8:0323 Vimicro Vc0323
194vc032x 0ac8:0328 A4Tech PK-130MG
195zc3xx 0ac8:301b Z-Star zc301b
196zc3xx 0ac8:303b Vimicro 0x303b
197zc3xx 0ac8:305b Z-star Vimicro zc0305b
198zc3xx 0ac8:307b Ldlc VC302+Ov7620
199vc032x 0ac8:c001 Sony embedded vimicro
200vc032x 0ac8:c002 Sony embedded vimicro
201spca508 0af9:0010 Hama USB Sightcam 100
202spca508 0af9:0011 Hama USB Sightcam 100
203sonixb 0c45:6001 Genius VideoCAM NB
204sonixb 0c45:6005 Microdia Sweex Mini Webcam
205sonixb 0c45:6007 Sonix sn9c101 + Tas5110D
206sonixb 0c45:6009 spcaCam@120
207sonixb 0c45:600d spcaCam@120
208sonixb 0c45:6011 Microdia PC Camera (SN9C102)
209sonixb 0c45:6019 Generic Sonix OV7630
210sonixb 0c45:6024 Generic Sonix Tas5130c
211sonixb 0c45:6025 Xcam Shanga
212sonixb 0c45:6028 Sonix Btc Pc380
213sonixb 0c45:6029 spcaCam@150
214sonixb 0c45:602c Generic Sonix OV7630
215sonixb 0c45:602d LIC-200 LG
216sonixb 0c45:602e Genius VideoCam Messenger
217sonixj 0c45:6040 Speed NVC 350K
218sonixj 0c45:607c Sonix sn9c102p Hv7131R
219sonixj 0c45:60c0 Sangha Sn535
220sonixj 0c45:60ec SN9C105+MO4000
221sonixj 0c45:60fb Surfer NoName
222sonixj 0c45:60fc LG-LIC300
223sonixj 0c45:612a Avant Camera
224sonixj 0c45:612c Typhoon Rasy Cam 1.3MPix
225sonixj 0c45:6130 Sonix Pccam
226sonixj 0c45:6138 Sn9c120 Mo4000
227sonixj 0c45:613b Surfer SN-206
228sonixj 0c45:613c Sonix Pccam168
229sunplus 0d64:0303 Sunplus FashionCam DXG
230etoms 102c:6151 Qcam Sangha CIF
231etoms 102c:6251 Qcam xxxxxx VGA
232zc3xx 10fd:0128 Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k 0x0128
233spca561 10fd:7e50 FlyCam Usb 100
234zc3xx 10fd:8050 Typhoon Webshot II USB 300k
235spca501 1776:501c Arowana 300K CMOS Camera
236t613 17a1:0128 T613/TAS5130A
237vc032x 17ef:4802 Lenovo Vc0323+MI1310_SOC
238pac207 2001:f115 D-Link DSB-C120
239spca500 2899:012c Toptro Industrial
240spca508 8086:0110 Intel Easy PC Camera
241spca500 8086:0630 Intel Pocket PC Camera
242spca506 99fa:8988 Grandtec V.cap
243spca561 abcd:cdee Petcam
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt
index b26f5195af51..73de4050d637 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/sn9c102.txt
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Loading can be done as shown below:
157 157
158 [root@localhost home]# modprobe sn9c102 158 [root@localhost home]# modprobe sn9c102
159 159
160Note that the module is called "sn9c102" for historic reasons, althought it 160Note that the module is called "sn9c102" for historic reasons, although it
161does not just support the SN9C102. 161does not just support the SN9C102.
162 162
163At this point all the devices supported by the driver and connected to the USB 163At this point all the devices supported by the driver and connected to the USB
diff --git a/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt b/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt
index e0bba8393c77..05138e8aea07 100644
--- a/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt
+++ b/Documentation/video4linux/w9968cf.txt
@@ -193,9 +193,6 @@ Description: Automatic 'ovcamchip' module loading: 0 disabled, 1 enabled.
193 loads that module automatically. This action is performed as 193 loads that module automatically. This action is performed as
194 once soon as the 'w9968cf' module is loaded into memory. 194 once soon as the 'w9968cf' module is loaded into memory.
195Default: 1 195Default: 1
196Note: The kernel must be compiled with the CONFIG_KMOD option
197 enabled for the 'ovcamchip' module to be loaded and for
198 this parameter to be present.
199------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 196-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
200Name: simcams 197Name: simcams
201Type: int 198Type: int
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
index 3102b81bef88..ea8714fcc3ad 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/hugetlbpage.txt
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ memory that is preset in system at this time. System administrators may want
77to put this command in one of the local rc init files. This will enable the 77to put this command in one of the local rc init files. This will enable the
78kernel to request huge pages early in the boot process (when the possibility 78kernel to request huge pages early in the boot process (when the possibility
79of getting physical contiguous pages is still very high). In either 79of getting physical contiguous pages is still very high). In either
80case, adminstrators will want to verify the number of hugepages actually 80case, administrators will want to verify the number of hugepages actually
81allocated by checking the sysctl or meminfo. 81allocated by checking the sysctl or meminfo.
82 82
83/proc/sys/vm/nr_overcommit_hugepages indicates how large the pool of 83/proc/sys/vm/nr_overcommit_hugepages indicates how large the pool of
@@ -95,6 +95,29 @@ this condition holds, however, no more surplus huge pages will be
95allowed on the system until one of the two sysctls are increased 95allowed on the system until one of the two sysctls are increased
96sufficiently, or the surplus huge pages go out of use and are freed. 96sufficiently, or the surplus huge pages go out of use and are freed.
97 97
98With support for multiple hugepage pools at run-time available, much of
99the hugepage userspace interface has been duplicated in sysfs. The above
100information applies to the default hugepage size (which will be
101controlled by the proc interfaces for backwards compatibility). The root
102hugepage control directory is
103
104 /sys/kernel/mm/hugepages
105
106For each hugepage size supported by the running kernel, a subdirectory
107will exist, of the form
108
109 hugepages-${size}kB
110
111Inside each of these directories, the same set of files will exist:
112
113 nr_hugepages
114 nr_overcommit_hugepages
115 free_hugepages
116 resv_hugepages
117 surplus_hugepages
118
119which function as described above for the default hugepage-sized case.
120
98If the user applications are going to request hugepages using mmap system 121If the user applications are going to request hugepages using mmap system
99call, then it is required that system administrator mount a file system of 122call, then it is required that system administrator mount a file system of
100type hugetlbfs: 123type hugetlbfs:
diff --git a/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt b/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt
index bad16d3f6a47..6aaaeb38730c 100644
--- a/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt
+++ b/Documentation/vm/numa_memory_policy.txt
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ most general to most specific:
58 the policy at the time they were allocated. 58 the policy at the time they were allocated.
59 59
60 VMA Policy: A "VMA" or "Virtual Memory Area" refers to a range of a task's 60 VMA Policy: A "VMA" or "Virtual Memory Area" refers to a range of a task's
61 virtual adddress space. A task may define a specific policy for a range 61 virtual address space. A task may define a specific policy for a range
62 of its virtual address space. See the MEMORY POLICIES APIS section, 62 of its virtual address space. See the MEMORY POLICIES APIS section,
63 below, for an overview of the mbind() system call used to set a VMA 63 below, for an overview of the mbind() system call used to set a VMA
64 policy. 64 policy.
@@ -353,7 +353,7 @@ follows:
353 353
354 Because of this extra reference counting, and because we must lookup 354 Because of this extra reference counting, and because we must lookup
355 shared policies in a tree structure under spinlock, shared policies are 355 shared policies in a tree structure under spinlock, shared policies are
356 more expensive to use in the page allocation path. This is expecially 356 more expensive to use in the page allocation path. This is especially
357 true for shared policies on shared memory regions shared by tasks running 357 true for shared policies on shared memory regions shared by tasks running
358 on different NUMA nodes. This extra overhead can be avoided by always 358 on different NUMA nodes. This extra overhead can be avoided by always
359 falling back to task or system default policy for shared memory regions, 359 falling back to task or system default policy for shared memory regions,
diff --git a/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt b/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt
index 10c2e411cca8..991c26a6ef64 100644
--- a/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt
+++ b/Documentation/volatile-considered-harmful.txt
@@ -114,6 +114,6 @@ CREDITS
114 114
115Original impetus and research by Randy Dunlap 115Original impetus and research by Randy Dunlap
116Written by Jonathan Corbet 116Written by Jonathan Corbet
117Improvements via coments from Satyam Sharma, Johannes Stezenbach, Jesper 117Improvements via comments from Satyam Sharma, Johannes Stezenbach, Jesper
118 Juhl, Heikki Orsila, H. Peter Anvin, Philipp Hahn, and Stefan 118 Juhl, Heikki Orsila, H. Peter Anvin, Philipp Hahn, and Stefan
119 Richter. 119 Richter.